{"title":"Small Business","description":"\u003cp\u003eSpreadsheet templates for small businesses, freelancers and creators, in Excel and Google Sheets. Bookkeeping, income and expense tracking, sales tax, invoices, client lists, orders, inventory and pricing, plus versions built for specific trades.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eType each sale or expense once and the summaries, charts and totals fill themselves. Every template is a tracking tool, not tax or accounting advice.\u003c\/p\u003e","products":[{"product_id":"project-management-spreadsheet","title":"Project Portfolio Dashboard Spreadsheet","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis project management spreadsheet keeps every project you run in one workbook. You enter a task once, and the Gantt timeline, the Kanban board, the Eisenhower matrix and the dashboard all update from it. There are no pivot tables to refresh and no subscription to pay.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlease read:\u003c\/strong\u003e This is a tracker tool only, not financial, tax, legal, medical or any other professional advice or advisory service. It records and calculates what you enter; you are solely responsible for checking all figures, rates, dates and results and for every decision you make. By purchasing, downloading or using it, you accept these terms (your statutory consumer rights are not affected).\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eThe dashboard\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eChoose All or a single project from one dropdown and the whole page follows your choice. You never type on it; it fills itself from the other tabs.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLive KPIs for open tasks, completed tasks, overdue tasks, open risks and spend, each charted per project\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eA portfolio timeline that shows every project as a Gantt bar, with work done, deliverables and today marked\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWork done against time gone, so the project that is slipping stands out\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOpen tasks due each week for the next two months, split by priority\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpend against budget by project, or by cost type for one project\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTasks by status: not started, in progress, on hold and completed\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTeam workload: open tasks per person, split into overdue, due this week and later\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe next open tasks by due date, with late ones flagged in red\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eA risk matrix of open risks and issues by impact and likelihood\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eThirteen connected tabs\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTask Manager:\u003c\/strong\u003e 1,000 rows, the one place every other tab reads from\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eProject Charter:\u003c\/strong\u003e scope, objectives, sponsor, budget and RAG status\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSchedule:\u003c\/strong\u003e a 120-day Gantt timeline drawn with conditional formatting, a gantt chart Excel draws without any add-in\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eKanban Board:\u003c\/strong\u003e a kanban board with four columns, fed straight from the status column\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eEisenhower Matrix:\u003c\/strong\u003e an Eisenhower matrix that sorts urgent against important automatically\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDeliverables Tracker:\u003c\/strong\u003e 300 rows with due dates, approvers and approval dates\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eRisks and Issues Register:\u003c\/strong\u003e 250 rows with impact, likelihood, owner and treatment plan\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eResource Allocation:\u003c\/strong\u003e 200 rows of workload across your team\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eStakeholder Analysis:\u003c\/strong\u003e 200 rows scoring influence against engagement\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBudget and Cost Tracker:\u003c\/strong\u003e 500 cost lines with budget, actual, variance, paid and left to pay\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eProject Dashboard, Setup and Start Here:\u003c\/strong\u003e the live overview, your projects, phases and owners for every dropdown, and a quick start with the color legend\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhat it does for you\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eMost templates are a project tracker with a task list and little else. Risk registers, stakeholder analysis and deliverable approvals are where projects are really controlled, and here they are built in.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHandle multi project work: up to 100 projects and 1,000 tasks in one file\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOverdue dates turn red on their own\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eColor follows status on every tab\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e20 charts and 56 dropdown lists, all native and all live\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFilter any view by project, phase, owner or priority\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eEvery figure is calculated, so nothing is typed twice\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eLight and dark editions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eEach download has a light edition and a dark edition with every tab restyled, not only the dashboard. Both use the same formulas, and both come filled with a worked example and as a blank copy, in Excel and in Google Sheets.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWorks with\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMicrosoft Excel 2016, 2019, 2021 and Microsoft 365, on Windows and Mac\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGoogle Sheets with a free Google account, as its own separate build tuned to stay responsive\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLibreOffice\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBuilt without dynamic arrays, spill ranges, macros or add-ins, so it behaves the same everywhere. No plugins and no subscription.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhat you download\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLight edition: the Excel workbook filled with a worked example, and a blank one\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDark edition: the same two files in the dark design\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe instruction guide, with one-click links to the Google Sheets versions (light and dark, filled and blank)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe terms of use as a PDF\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eYour files are ready the moment payment clears. Use it for personal and business work, on your own devices and with your own team, but please do not share or resell the files. Questions before or after you buy? Use our contact page and we will help.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it work in Excel, Google Sheets or both?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eBoth. You get Excel workbooks for Excel 2016 or later on Windows and Mac, and the instruction guide has one-click links to the Google Sheets versions, which are a separate build tuned to stay responsive.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow many projects and tasks can it hold?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eUp to 100 projects and 1,000 tasks in one file. The Task Manager tab is the single list that feeds everything else.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDo I have to draw the Gantt chart myself?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. The Schedule tab draws a 120-day Gantt timeline with conditional formatting from the dates in your tasks, and the dashboard adds a portfolio timeline for every project.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWill it work on an older Excel or on a Mac?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. It is built without dynamic arrays, spill ranges, macros or add-ins, so it behaves the same on Excel 2016, Excel for Mac, Microsoft 365, LibreOffice and Google Sheets.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan my team use it?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. It is licensed for personal and business use with your own team. The Resource Allocation tab and the team workload panel show open tasks per person.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OPXVIA","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":67597859651678,"sku":"OPX-001","price":29.0,"currency_code":"CAD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0769\/2094\/6782\/files\/project-management-spreadsheet-01.jpg?v=1790831928"},{"product_id":"small-business-bookkeeping-spreadsheet","title":"Small Business Bookkeeping Spreadsheet","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis small business bookkeeping spreadsheet keeps a whole year of your books in a file you own outright. Record money in and money out, and it produces your profit and loss, sales tax, quarterly set-aside and a live dashboard without a subscription.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlease read:\u003c\/strong\u003e This is a tracker tool only, not financial, tax, legal, medical or any other professional advice or advisory service. It records and calculates what you enter; you are solely responsible for checking all figures, rates, dates and results and for every decision you make. By purchasing, downloading or using it, you accept these terms (your statutory consumer rights are not affected).\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eThe dashboard\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eChoose Full year or any month and the whole page follows. Nothing on the dashboard is typed; it fills itself from your two registers.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFive live cards: income, expenses, profit, margin and tax to set aside, each with twelve-month bars\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIncome against expenses every month, with your profit so far this year drawn as a line\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSales tax collected, tax claimed back and what is left owing\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpending by category: the eight biggest and the rest\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eQuarterly tax set-aside: what to put aside each quarter, with its due date\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBusiness miles by month and what they are worth\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eProfit margin: how much of each month's income you kept\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTop clients: who pays you most, and how much of your income the top one makes up\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eInvoices paid, waiting and overdue, and how many are still open\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eTwo registers in, seventeen tabs out\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eYou enter money in on one tab and money out on another, pick a tax rate for each line, and everything else reads those two. The monthly view, the quarterly view, the profit and loss statement, the sales tax worksheet and the dashboard all recalculate. Nothing is typed twice, and no number on a report can disagree with the ledger it came from.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eIncome:\u003c\/strong\u003e 500 rows, with the tax split out on every line\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eExpenses:\u003c\/strong\u003e 500 rows, split the same way\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSetup:\u003c\/strong\u003e your categories, your tax rates and your set-aside percentage\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMonthly:\u003c\/strong\u003e twelve months of income, spending, profit and margin\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuarterly:\u003c\/strong\u003e the four quarters, with tax due and tax to set aside\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eProfit and Loss:\u003c\/strong\u003e every category with its share and the margin\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSales Tax:\u003c\/strong\u003e collected against paid, by rate and by quarter\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCustom Range:\u003c\/strong\u003e pick any two dates and everything follows\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eComparison:\u003c\/strong\u003e this year against last, month by month\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBalances:\u003c\/strong\u003e what each account took in and paid out\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eClients:\u003c\/strong\u003e billed, jobs, average and last paid, read from the ledger\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eInvoices:\u003c\/strong\u003e an invoice tracker for what is out, what is paid and what is overdue\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eInventory:\u003c\/strong\u003e unit cost, sell price, margin and stock value\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMileage:\u003c\/strong\u003e logged at your own rate\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eDashboard and Start Here\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt is built for anyone running a small business, or self employed, who wants their own numbers in an income tracker and expense tracker they control. It splits sales tax out of every line, nets it quarter by quarter, and compares any two years month by month.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eLight and dark editions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eEvery download has a light edition and a dark edition, with every tab restyled, not only the dashboard, and the same formulas in both. The filled copy holds two full years of demo data, so the comparison view has something real to compare.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWorks with\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMicrosoft Excel 2016, 2019, 2021 and Microsoft 365, on Windows and Mac, and LibreOffice. No Microsoft 365 subscription needed, and no Google account needed for the Excel files.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGoogle Sheets with a free Google account. You get real spreadsheet files, not a PDF with a link in it.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo add-ins, no macros, no subscription and no bank connection\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhat you download\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLight edition: the Excel workbook filled with a worked example, and a blank one\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDark edition: the same two files in the dark design\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe instruction guide, with one-click links to the Google Sheets versions (light and dark, filled and blank)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe terms of use as a PDF\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eYour files are ready as soon as payment clears. The template is for use in your own business; please do not share or resell the files. Questions before or after you buy? Use our contact page and we will help.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it work in Excel and Google Sheets?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The Excel workbooks run in Excel 2016 or later on Windows and Mac without a Google account, and the instruction guide has one-click links to the Google Sheets versions.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow much do I have to type?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eOnly two registers: money in on the Income tab and money out on the Expenses tab, 500 rows each, with a tax rate picked per line. Every other tab is calculated.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it handle sales tax?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. It splits sales tax out of every line, nets tax collected against tax paid quarter by quarter, and shows what is left owing.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it help me put money aside for income tax?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. It turns your real profit into a quarterly set-aside at the percentage you choose, with each quarter's due date on the dashboard.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs this accounting advice?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. It is a bookkeeping tool that records and calculates what you enter, not tax or accounting advice.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OPXVIA","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":67597861060702,"sku":"OPX-019","price":35.0,"currency_code":"CAD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0769\/2094\/6782\/files\/small-business-bookkeeping-spreadsheet-01.jpg?v=1790832031"},{"product_id":"sales-tax-tracker-spreadsheet","title":"Sales Tax Tracker Spreadsheet","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis sales tax tracker shows the tax you collected and the tax you paid, quarter by quarter, before the quarterly tax return is due. It is made for anyone who charges tax at more than one rate and dreads the quarterly return, whether you call it sales tax, VAT, GST or HST.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlease read:\u003c\/strong\u003e This is a tracker tool only, not financial, tax, legal, medical or any other professional advice or advisory service. It records and calculates what you enter; you are solely responsible for checking all figures, rates, dates and results and for every decision you make. By purchasing, downloading or using it, you accept these terms (your statutory consumer rights are not affected).\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eThe shape of a real return\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eTax collected against tax paid is split by tax and by quarter, the way an actual return is laid out, not as a single total. You enter money in on one tab and money out on another, pick a tax code (one tax or two, such as GST plus PST) for each line, and everything else reads those two. The monthly view, the quarterly view, the profit and loss statement, the sales tax worksheet and the dashboard all recalculate. Nothing is typed twice, and no number on a report can disagree with the ledger it came from.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eTax codes you set up yourself\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUp to 20 tax codes, each with one or two taxes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePrices typed with tax included or without it\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eA By Tax view of each tax you deal with: collected, claimed back and net\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe effective rate per quarter, so an odd quarter stands out\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eThat makes it a vat tracker and a gst hst tracker in the same file.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eTwelve connected tabs\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eIncome:\u003c\/strong\u003e 500 rows, with the tax split out on every line\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eExpenses:\u003c\/strong\u003e 500 rows, split the same way\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSetup:\u003c\/strong\u003e your categories, your tax rates and your set-aside percentage\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMonthly:\u003c\/strong\u003e twelve months of income, spending, profit and margin\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuarterly:\u003c\/strong\u003e the four quarters, with tax due and tax to set aside\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eProfit and Loss:\u003c\/strong\u003e every category with its share and the margin\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSales Tax:\u003c\/strong\u003e collected against paid, by tax and by quarter\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCustom Range:\u003c\/strong\u003e pick any two dates and everything follows\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eComparison:\u003c\/strong\u003e this year against last, month by month\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBalances:\u003c\/strong\u003e what each account took in and paid out\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDashboard:\u003c\/strong\u003e six live figures and the four quarters\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eStart Here:\u003c\/strong\u003e walks you through setup in a few minutes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhat it does for you\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSplits sales tax out of every line automatically\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNets tax collected against tax paid, quarter by quarter\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTurns real profit into a quarterly set-aside at your own rate\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRanks every category by its share of income and of spending\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCompares any two years month by month, as percentages\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCharts that redraw from your own numbers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe filled copy holds two full years of demo data, so the comparison view has something real to compare. It also works as an everyday small business bookkeeping file for income and expenses.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWorks with\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMicrosoft Excel 2016, 2019, 2021 and Microsoft 365, on Windows and Mac, and LibreOffice. No Microsoft 365 subscription needed, and no Google account needed for the Excel files.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGoogle Sheets with a free Google account. You get real spreadsheet files, not a PDF with a link in it.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo add-ins, no macros, no subscription and no bank connection\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhat you download\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe Excel workbook, filled with a worked example\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe same workbook, blank and ready for your own numbers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe instruction guide, with one-click links to the Google Sheets versions (filled and blank)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe terms of use as a PDF\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eYour files are ready as soon as payment clears. The template is for use in your own business; please do not share or resell the files. Questions before or after you buy? Use our contact page and we will help.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I use it in Excel or Google Sheets?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eBoth. The Excel workbook runs in Excel 2016 or later on Windows and Mac, and the instruction guide holds two one-click links to the Google Sheets versions.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it work for VAT, GST and HST as well as sales tax?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. You set up your own tax codes, up to 20, each with one or two taxes, such as GST plus PST.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I enter prices with tax already included?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Each tax code lets you type prices with or without tax, and the tax is split out of every line automatically.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWill it show me what I owe each quarter?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. It nets tax collected against tax paid by tax and by quarter, and shows the effective rate per quarter so an unusual quarter stands out.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs it tax advice?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. It is a bookkeeping tool that records and calculates what you enter. Check the figures before you file.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OPXVIA","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":67597861093470,"sku":"OPX-020","price":29.0,"currency_code":"CAD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0769\/2094\/6782\/files\/sales-tax-tracker-spreadsheet-01.jpg?v=1790832036"},{"product_id":"freelancer-income-tax-tracker","title":"Freelancer Income and Tax Dashboard Spreadsheet","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis freelancer tax tracker puts invoicing, chasing payments and setting tax aside into one file. Every invoice you raise feeds the same ledger the tax set-aside reads, so getting paid and planning for tax become one job.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlease read:\u003c\/strong\u003e This is a tracker tool only, not financial, tax, legal, medical or any other professional advice or advisory service. It records and calculates what you enter; you are solely responsible for checking all figures, rates, dates and results and for every decision you make. By purchasing, downloading or using it, you accept these terms (your statutory consumer rights are not affected).\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eThe dashboard\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eChoose Full year or any quarter and the whole page follows. Nothing on it is typed; it fills itself from what you enter.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFive live cards: income, costs, profit, tax to set aside and tax still to pay, each with its bars\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eEach month's income split into costs, tax to set aside and what is yours to keep\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIncome by client: who pays you most, and how much of your income the top one makes up\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCash to keep aside: tax still to pay plus sales tax owing: the cash not to spend\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePaid against owed: each quarter's set-aside, what you paid and its status\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNext payment: what is still owed, when it is due and how many days are left\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWhat you can claim: your biggest costs by category, plus what your mileage is worth\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eInvoices still out: the biggest unpaid invoices and which ones are late\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eOne ledger for invoices and tax\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eYou enter money in on one tab and money out on another, pick a tax rate for each line, and everything else reads those two. The monthly view, the quarterly view, the profit and loss statement, the sales tax worksheet and the dashboard all recalculate. Nothing is typed twice, and no number on a report can disagree with the ledger it came from.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eSixteen connected tabs\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eIncome:\u003c\/strong\u003e 500 rows, with the tax split out on every line\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eExpenses:\u003c\/strong\u003e 500 rows, split the same way\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSetup:\u003c\/strong\u003e your categories, your tax rates and your set-aside percentage\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMonthly:\u003c\/strong\u003e twelve months of income, spending, profit and margin\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuarterly:\u003c\/strong\u003e the four quarters, with tax due and tax to set aside\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eProfit and Loss:\u003c\/strong\u003e every category with its share and the margin\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSales Tax:\u003c\/strong\u003e collected against paid, by rate and by quarter\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCustom Range:\u003c\/strong\u003e pick any two dates and everything follows\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eComparison:\u003c\/strong\u003e this year against last, month by month\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBalances:\u003c\/strong\u003e what each account took in and paid out\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eInvoices:\u003c\/strong\u003e an invoice tracker for what is out, paid, outstanding and overdue, with days late counted\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eClients:\u003c\/strong\u003e billed, jobs, average and last paid, read from the ledger\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eEstimated Tax:\u003c\/strong\u003e four quarterly tax set-asides at your own rate\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMileage:\u003c\/strong\u003e logged at your own rate\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDashboard:\u003c\/strong\u003e six live figures and the four quarters\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eStart Here\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhat it does for you\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt splits sales tax out of every line, nets it quarter by quarter, turns real profit into a set-aside at your rate, ranks every category by share and compares any two years month by month. It is made for self employed people who invoice, chase and dread the quarterly set-aside, and it doubles as an income tracker and expense tracker. The filled copy holds two full years of demo data, so the comparison view has something real to compare.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWorks with\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMicrosoft Excel 2016, 2019, 2021 and Microsoft 365, on Windows and Mac, and LibreOffice. No Microsoft 365 subscription needed, and no Google account needed for the Excel files.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGoogle Sheets with a free Google account. You get real spreadsheet files, not a PDF with a link in it.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo add-ins, no macros, no subscription and no bank connection\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhat you download\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe Excel workbook, filled with a worked example\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe same workbook, blank and ready for your own numbers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe instruction guide, with one-click links to the Google Sheets versions (filled and blank)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe terms of use as a PDF\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eYour files are ready as soon as payment clears. The template is for use in your own business; please do not share or resell the files. Questions before or after you buy? Use our contact page and we will help.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I use it in Excel or Google Sheets?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eBoth. The Excel workbook runs in Excel 2016 or later on Windows and Mac, and the instruction guide has two one-click links to the Google Sheets versions.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow does it work out how much tax to set aside?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Estimated Tax tab turns your real profit into four quarterly set-asides at the rate you choose, and the dashboard shows the next payment, its due date and the days left.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it track unpaid invoices?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The Invoices tab shows what is out, paid, outstanding and overdue with days late counted, and the dashboard lists the biggest unpaid invoices.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I see which clients pay me most?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The Clients tab reads billed, jobs, average and last paid from the ledger, and the dashboard shows how much of your income the top client makes up.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs this tax advice?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. It is a bookkeeping tool that records and calculates what you enter, at the rates you set.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OPXVIA","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":67597861159006,"sku":"OPX-022","price":29.0,"currency_code":"CAD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0769\/2094\/6782\/files\/freelancer-income-tax-tracker-01.jpg?v=1790832048"},{"product_id":"service-business-client-tracker","title":"Service Business Client Tracker and Bookkeeping","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis client tracker for service businesses keeps your client list and your books in the same file. It is made for trades and service businesses: type a client's name once and what they were billed, how many jobs they gave you, the average job and when they last paid all calculate themselves from the ledger.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlease read:\u003c\/strong\u003e This is a tracker tool only, not financial, tax, legal, medical or any other professional advice or advisory service. It records and calculates what you enter; you are solely responsible for checking all figures, rates, dates and results and for every decision you make. By purchasing, downloading or using it, you accept these terms (your statutory consumer rights are not affected).\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eClients without a separate CRM\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eMost people keep a CRM spreadsheet in one place and their bookkeeping in another, and the two drift apart. Here the Clients tab reads straight from the money you record, so it is always up to date.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUp to 60 clients, each with a status\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBilled, job count, average job and last paid, all calculated\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eInvoices out, paid, outstanding and overdue, with days late counted\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSite visits logged as mileage at your own rate\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eOne ledger behind everything\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eYou enter money in on one tab and money out on another, pick a tax rate for each line, and everything else reads those two. The monthly view, the quarterly view, the profit and loss statement, the sales tax worksheet and the dashboard all recalculate. Nothing is typed twice, and no number on a report can disagree with the ledger it came from. The dashboard shows six live figures and the four quarters.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eSixteen connected tabs\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eIncome:\u003c\/strong\u003e 500 rows, with the tax split out on every line\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eExpenses:\u003c\/strong\u003e 500 rows, split the same way\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSetup:\u003c\/strong\u003e your categories, your tax rates and your set-aside percentage\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMonthly:\u003c\/strong\u003e twelve months of income, spending, profit and margin\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuarterly:\u003c\/strong\u003e the four quarters, with tax due and tax to set aside\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eProfit and Loss:\u003c\/strong\u003e every category with its share and the margin\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSales Tax:\u003c\/strong\u003e collected against paid, by rate and by quarter\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCustom Range:\u003c\/strong\u003e pick any two dates and everything follows\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eComparison:\u003c\/strong\u003e this year against last, month by month\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBalances:\u003c\/strong\u003e what each account took in and paid out\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eClients:\u003c\/strong\u003e 60 rows with status, billed, jobs, average and last paid\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eInvoices:\u003c\/strong\u003e an invoice tracker for what is out, paid, outstanding and overdue\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eEstimated Tax:\u003c\/strong\u003e four quarterly set-asides at your own rate\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMileage:\u003c\/strong\u003e site visits logged at your own rate\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDashboard:\u003c\/strong\u003e six live figures and the four quarters\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eStart Here:\u003c\/strong\u003e walks you through setup in a few minutes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhat it does for you\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSplits sales tax out of every line automatically\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNets tax collected against tax paid, quarter by quarter\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTurns real profit into a quarterly set-aside at your own rate\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRanks every category by its share of income and of spending\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCompares any two years month by month, as percentages\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCharts that redraw from your own numbers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt works as a job tracker, an income tracker and an expense tracker in one. The filled copy holds two full years of demo data, so the comparison view has something real to compare.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWorks with\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMicrosoft Excel 2016, 2019, 2021 and Microsoft 365, on Windows and Mac, and LibreOffice. No Microsoft 365 subscription needed, and no Google account needed for the Excel files.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGoogle Sheets with a free Google account. You get real spreadsheet files, not a PDF with a link in it.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo add-ins, no macros, no subscription and no bank connection\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhat you download\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe Excel workbook, filled with a worked example\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe same workbook, blank and ready for your own numbers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe instruction guide, with one-click links to the Google Sheets versions (filled and blank)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe terms of use as a PDF\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eYour files are ready as soon as payment clears. The template is for use in your own business; please do not share or resell the files. Questions before or after you buy? Use our contact page and we will help.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it work in Excel and Google Sheets?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The Excel workbook runs in Excel 2016 or later on Windows and Mac, and the instruction guide holds two one-click links to the Google Sheets versions.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow many clients can I track?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Clients tab has 60 rows, each with a status, and billed, jobs, average and last paid calculate from the ledger.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDo I have to update client totals by hand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. You type a client's name once on each income line and their totals calculate themselves.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it track overdue invoices?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The Invoices tab shows what is out, paid, outstanding and overdue, with the days late counted.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it help with tax?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt splits sales tax out of every line, nets it by quarter and turns profit into four quarterly set-asides at your own rate. It is a bookkeeping tool, not tax advice.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OPXVIA","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":67597861584990,"sku":"OPX-023","price":38.0,"currency_code":"CAD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0769\/2094\/6782\/files\/service-business-client-tracker-01.jpg?v=1790832054"},{"product_id":"reseller-profit-tracker","title":"Reseller Profit Dashboard Spreadsheet","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis reseller profit tracker gives every item its own cost basis, so your margin is a real number and not a hope. It suits thrift flipping and anyone reselling on eBay, Poshmark or other platforms, and shows what each item, each platform and each month actually made.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlease read:\u003c\/strong\u003e This is a tracker tool only, not financial, tax, legal, medical or any other professional advice or advisory service. It records and calculates what you enter; you are solely responsible for checking all figures, rates, dates and results and for every decision you make. By purchasing, downloading or using it, you accept these terms (your statutory consumer rights are not affected).\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eThe dashboard\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003ePick Full year or any month and the whole page follows. Nothing on it is typed; it fills itself from what you enter.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFive live cards: sales, profit, items sold, sell-through and stock at cost, each with monthly bars\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSales against costs every month, with profit so far this year as a line\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSold against still listed for each category\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUnsold stock at cost at each month end, with profit on items sold\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eEvery item you bought: not listed, listed or sold\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eProfit by platform after fees and shipping, and how many items sold there\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDays to sell, from listing to sale, and the average\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBest flips: the five items that made the most profit\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpending by category: sourcing, shipping, fees and the rest\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eCost basis per item\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eUnit cost against sell price, margin on every line, and the value of your shelf at both cost and retail. You enter money in on one tab and money out on another, pick a tax rate for each line, and everything else reads those two. The monthly view, the quarterly view, the profit and loss statement, the sales tax worksheet and the dashboard all recalculate. Nothing is typed twice, and no number on a report can disagree with the ledger it came from.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFifteen connected tabs\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eIncome:\u003c\/strong\u003e 500 rows, with the tax split out on every line\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eExpenses:\u003c\/strong\u003e 500 rows, split the same way\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSetup:\u003c\/strong\u003e your categories, your tax rates and your set-aside percentage\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMonthly:\u003c\/strong\u003e twelve months of income, spending, profit and margin\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuarterly:\u003c\/strong\u003e the four quarters, with tax due and tax to set aside\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eProfit and Loss:\u003c\/strong\u003e every category with its share and the margin\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSales Tax:\u003c\/strong\u003e collected against paid, by rate and by quarter\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCustom Range:\u003c\/strong\u003e pick any two dates and everything follows\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eComparison:\u003c\/strong\u003e this year against last, month by month\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBalances:\u003c\/strong\u003e what each account took in and paid out\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eInventory:\u003c\/strong\u003e an inventory tracker with 200 lines of cost, price, margin and stock value, plus a reorder level per item that flags itself when stock drops\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eEstimated Tax:\u003c\/strong\u003e four quarterly set-asides at your own rate\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMileage:\u003c\/strong\u003e sourcing runs logged at your own rate\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDashboard:\u003c\/strong\u003e six live figures and the four quarters\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eStart Here\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eLight and dark editions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eEvery download has a light edition and a dark edition, every tab restyled and the same formulas in both. The filled copy holds two full years of demo data, so the comparison view has something real to compare. It doubles as bookkeeping and an expense tracker for a small business.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWorks with\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMicrosoft Excel 2016, 2019, 2021 and Microsoft 365, on Windows and Mac, and LibreOffice. No Microsoft 365 subscription needed, and no Google account needed for the Excel files.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGoogle Sheets with a free Google account. You get real spreadsheet files, not a PDF with a link in it.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo add-ins, no macros, no subscription and no bank connection\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhat you download\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLight edition: the Excel workbook filled with a worked example, and a blank one\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDark edition: the same two files in the dark design\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe instruction guide, with one-click links to the Google Sheets versions (light and dark, filled and blank)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe terms of use as a PDF\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eYour files are ready as soon as payment clears. The template is for use in your own business; please do not share or resell the files. Questions before or after you buy? Use our contact page and we will help.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it work in Excel or Google Sheets?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eBoth. The Excel workbooks run in Excel 2016 or later on Windows and Mac, and the instruction guide has one-click links to the Google Sheets versions.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I compare profit across selling platforms?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The dashboard shows what each platform made after fees and shipping, and how many items sold there.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow many items can it hold?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Inventory tab has 200 lines, each with cost, price, margin and stock value, and a reorder level that flags itself when stock drops.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I see how long items take to sell?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The dashboard shows the days from listing to sale for items and the average, plus sell-through and what is still listed.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I log mileage for sourcing trips?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The Mileage tab logs sourcing runs at your own rate.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OPXVIA","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":67597861617758,"sku":"OPX-024","price":27.0,"currency_code":"CAD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0769\/2094\/6782\/files\/reseller-profit-tracker-01.jpg?v=1790832060"},{"product_id":"quarterly-estimated-tax-spreadsheet","title":"Quarterly Estimated Tax Spreadsheet","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis quarterly estimated tax spreadsheet helps you set tax aside as you earn it, instead of finding out what you owe in April. It is built for self employed people, and each quarter reads your own income and expenses, so a slow quarter sets aside less: four real figures, not four equal guesses.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlease read:\u003c\/strong\u003e This is a tracker tool only, not financial, tax, legal, medical or any other professional advice or advisory service. It records and calculates what you enter; you are solely responsible for checking all figures, rates, dates and results and for every decision you make. By purchasing, downloading or using it, you accept these terms (your statutory consumer rights are not affected).\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eHow the quarterly tax set-aside works\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe Estimated Tax tab shows profit, set-aside, due date and a running total for every quarter\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOne rate on the Setup tab covers income tax plus self-employment tax or National Insurance\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eInstallment dates are filled in, and you can overwrite them if yours differ\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe dashboard shows six live figures and the four quarters side by side\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eOne ledger behind every figure\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eYou enter money in on one tab and money out on another, pick a tax rate for each line, and everything else reads those two. The monthly view, the quarterly view, the profit and loss statement, the sales tax worksheet and the dashboard all recalculate. Nothing is typed twice, and no number on a report can disagree with the ledger it came from.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eTwelve connected tabs\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eIncome:\u003c\/strong\u003e 500 rows, with the tax split out on every line\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eExpenses:\u003c\/strong\u003e 500 rows, split the same way\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSetup:\u003c\/strong\u003e your categories, your tax rates and your set-aside percentage\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMonthly:\u003c\/strong\u003e twelve months of income, spending, profit and margin\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eQuarterly:\u003c\/strong\u003e the four quarters, with tax due and tax to set aside\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eProfit and Loss:\u003c\/strong\u003e every category with its share and the margin\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSales Tax:\u003c\/strong\u003e collected against paid, by rate and by quarter\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCustom Range:\u003c\/strong\u003e pick any two dates and everything follows\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eComparison:\u003c\/strong\u003e this year against last, month by month\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBalances:\u003c\/strong\u003e what each account took in and paid out\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eEstimated Tax:\u003c\/strong\u003e profit, set-aside, due date and running total per quarter\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDashboard:\u003c\/strong\u003e six live figures and the four quarters\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eStart Here:\u003c\/strong\u003e walks you through setup in a few minutes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhat it does for you\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSplits sales tax out of every line automatically\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNets tax collected against tax paid, quarter by quarter\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTurns real profit into a quarterly set-aside at your own rate\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRanks every category by its share of income and of spending\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCompares any two years month by month, as percentages\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCharts that redraw from your own numbers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt also works as a tax planner and a full income tracker and expense tracker, with a profit and loss statement built in. The filled copy holds two full years of demo data, so the comparison view has something real to compare.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWorks with\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMicrosoft Excel 2016, 2019, 2021 and Microsoft 365, on Windows and Mac, and LibreOffice. No Microsoft 365 subscription needed, and no Google account needed for the Excel files.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGoogle Sheets with a free Google account. You get real spreadsheet files, not a PDF with a link in it.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo add-ins, no macros, no subscription and no bank connection\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhat you download\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe Excel workbook, filled with a worked example\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe same workbook, blank and ready for your own numbers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe instruction guide, with one-click links to the Google Sheets versions (filled and blank)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe terms of use as a PDF\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eYour files are ready as soon as payment clears. The template is for use in your own business; please do not share or resell the files. Questions before or after you buy? Use our contact page and we will help.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I use it in Excel and Google Sheets?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The Excel workbook runs in Excel 2016 or later on Windows and Mac, and the instruction guide holds two one-click links to the Google Sheets versions.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow does it work out each quarter's set-aside?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eEach quarter reads the profit in your own income and expense registers and applies your rate, so a slow quarter sets aside less than a busy one.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it include self-employment tax or National Insurance?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. One rate on the Setup tab covers income tax plus self-employment tax or National Insurance, at the percentage you choose.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat if my payment dates are different?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe installment dates can be overwritten if yours differ.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it calculate my tax bill for me?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. It sets money aside at the rate you enter and records what you enter. It is a bookkeeping tool, not tax or accounting advice.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OPXVIA","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":67597861683294,"sku":"OPX-025","price":27.0,"currency_code":"CAD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0769\/2094\/6782\/files\/quarterly-estimated-tax-spreadsheet-01.jpg?v=1790832065"},{"product_id":"inventory-stock-tracker","title":"Inventory and Stock Tracker Spreadsheet","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis inventory tracker spreadsheet gives makers and small business shops a stock count that matches what is actually on the shelf. Everything you make and everything you sell is counted off one stock log, so the number on the dashboard cannot drift away from the one in the room.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlease read:\u003c\/strong\u003e This is a tracker tool only, not financial, tax, legal, medical or any other professional advice or advisory service. It records and calculates what you enter; you are solely responsible for checking all figures, rates, dates and results and for every decision you make. By purchasing, downloading or using it, you accept these terms (your statutory consumer rights are not affected).\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eThe dashboard\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003ePick all categories or a single one and the whole page follows. Nothing on it is typed; it fills itself from what you enter.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eStock at cost: what the stock on your shelves cost to make, and what it sells for\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIn and out by month: everything made and everything that left, with the count on hand at each month end\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRestock list: lines at or under their reorder level, how many to make and what it costs\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFastest movers: the products that sold most in the last 90 days\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHow many weeks your stock lasts at the pace of the last 90 days\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eValue by category, with every share as a percentage\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eStock by location: shelves, stockroom, market box and more\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNot selling: stock with no sale in 90 days, its last sale and the cash it ties up\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eOne file, actually connected\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eA product is entered once, on the Products tab. The recipe, the pricing calculator, the stock valuation and every order line all read that same row. Change one thing and everything that depends on it follows, with no copying a figure from one spreadsheet into another and hoping you remembered.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eEleven connected tabs\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eProducts:\u003c\/strong\u003e 120 rows, the one place a product is entered\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaterials:\u003c\/strong\u003e a materials tracker with 120 rows and the unit cost of each\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePricing:\u003c\/strong\u003e cost, suggested price, your price, and margin before and after fees\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eInventory:\u003c\/strong\u003e stock on hand, valued at cost and at retail\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOrders:\u003c\/strong\u003e 400 lines with profit per line\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSales:\u003c\/strong\u003e the year by month, with fees and postage taken off\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eStock Log:\u003c\/strong\u003e every batch made and every unit that left, with a reorder level per product that flags itself\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eRecipe:\u003c\/strong\u003e the materials in each product, priced from the Materials tab\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDashboard:\u003c\/strong\u003e six live figures and what each product did\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eSetup and Start Here\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhat it does for you\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePrices every product from its own recipe of materials\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAdds your labor rate and overhead per item automatically\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eShows the margin you actually keep after the platform's cut\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eValues your stock at cost and at retail\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlags anything below your reorder level, or below your target margin\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt is a stock tracker, cost tracker and reorder tracker for a handmade or craft business. The filled copy holds a whole year of a working shop, so you can see how it behaves before you type anything.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWorks with\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMicrosoft Excel 2016, 2019, 2021 and Microsoft 365, on Windows and Mac, and LibreOffice. No Microsoft 365 subscription needed.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGoogle Sheets with a free Google account. You get real spreadsheet files, not a PDF with a link in it.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo add-ins, no macros and no subscription\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhat you download\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe Excel workbook, filled with a worked example\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe same workbook, blank and ready for your own numbers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe instruction guide, with one-click links to the Google Sheets versions (filled and blank)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe terms of use as a PDF\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eYour files are ready as soon as payment clears. The template is for use in your own business; please do not share or resell the files. Questions before or after you buy? Use our contact page and we will help.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it work in Excel and Google Sheets?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The Excel workbook runs in Excel 2016 or later on Windows and Mac, and the instruction guide has two one-click links to the Google Sheets versions.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow many products and orders can it hold?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Products and Materials tabs have 120 rows each, and the Orders tab has 400 lines with profit per line.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWill it tell me when to restock?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Each product has a reorder level that flags itself when stock drops, and the dashboard's restock list shows how many to make and what it costs.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I track stock in more than one place?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The dashboard shows what is kept where, such as shelves, stockroom and market box.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it work out what my products cost to make?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The Recipe tab prices each product from its materials, and the workbook adds your labor rate and overhead per item.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OPXVIA","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":67597861748830,"sku":"OPX-026","price":22.0,"currency_code":"CAD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0769\/2094\/6782\/files\/inventory-stock-tracker-01.jpg?v=1790832072"},{"product_id":"handmade-pricing-calculator","title":"Handmade Pricing Calculator Spreadsheet","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis pricing calculator spreadsheet is for anyone who has priced something by feel and suspected they were underselling it. It builds each product's cost from materials, labor and overhead, then suggests a price at the margin you choose and shows what you keep after fees.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlease read:\u003c\/strong\u003e This is a tracker tool only, not financial, tax, legal, medical or any other professional advice or advisory service. It records and calculates what you enter; you are solely responsible for checking all figures, rates, dates and results and for every decision you make. By purchasing, downloading or using it, you accept these terms (your statutory consumer rights are not affected).\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003ePrice from the recipe, not a guess\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eEach product's cost is built from its recipe of materials, so changing one material's unit cost re-prices every product it goes into. Your labor rate and overhead are added per item automatically.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe suggested price at the margin you set, in one cell\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMargin after the platform fee, so what lands is never a surprise\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAnything priced below your own target flags itself red\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eOne file, actually connected\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eA product is entered once, on the Products tab. The recipe, the pricing calculator, the stock valuation and every order line all read that same row. Change one thing and everything that depends on it follows, with no copying a figure from one spreadsheet into another and hoping you remembered.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eTen connected tabs\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eProducts:\u003c\/strong\u003e 120 rows, the one place a product is entered\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaterials:\u003c\/strong\u003e 120 rows with the unit cost of each\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePricing:\u003c\/strong\u003e cost, suggested price, your price, and margin before and after fees\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eInventory:\u003c\/strong\u003e stock on hand, valued at cost and at retail\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOrders:\u003c\/strong\u003e 400 lines with profit per line\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSales:\u003c\/strong\u003e the year by month, with fees and postage taken off\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDashboard:\u003c\/strong\u003e six live figures and what each product did\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSetup and Start Here:\u003c\/strong\u003e setup takes a few minutes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhat it does for you\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePrices every product from its own recipe of materials\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAdds your labor rate and overhead per item automatically\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eShows the margin you actually keep after the platform's cut\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eValues your stock at cost and at retail\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlags anything below your reorder level, or below your target margin\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCharts that redraw from your own numbers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt brings product costing, profit margin and a cost tracker together for a handmade business or craft business, with an inventory tracker built in. The filled copy holds a whole year of a working shop, so you can see how it behaves before you type anything.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWorks with\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMicrosoft Excel 2016, 2019, 2021 and Microsoft 365, on Windows and Mac, and LibreOffice. No Microsoft 365 subscription needed.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGoogle Sheets with a free Google account. You get real spreadsheet files, not a PDF with a link in it.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo add-ins, no macros and no subscription\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhat you download\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe Excel workbook, filled with a worked example\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe same workbook, blank and ready for your own numbers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe instruction guide, with one-click links to the Google Sheets versions (filled and blank)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe terms of use as a PDF\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eYour files are ready as soon as payment clears. The template is for use in your own business; please do not share or resell the files. Questions before or after you buy? Use our contact page and we will help.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it work in Excel and Google Sheets?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The Excel workbook runs in Excel 2016 or later on Windows and Mac, and the instruction guide holds two one-click links to the Google Sheets versions.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow does it work out a price?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt builds the cost from each product's recipe of materials, adds your labor rate and overhead per item, and suggests a price at the margin you set.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it account for selling fees?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The Pricing tab shows margin before and after fees, so you see what you actually keep after the platform's cut.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat happens when a material gets more expensive?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eChange that material's unit cost once and every product it goes into is re-priced.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWill it warn me if a price is too low?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Anything priced below your own target margin flags itself red.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OPXVIA","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":67597861781598,"sku":"OPX-027","price":22.0,"currency_code":"CAD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0769\/2094\/6782\/files\/handmade-pricing-calculator-01.jpg?v=1790832078"},{"product_id":"order-shipping-tracker","title":"Order and Shipping Tracker Spreadsheet","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis order tracker spreadsheet tells you what is still to go out and what it is worth. It is made for shops with more orders than they can hold in their head, on more than one channel, and it works out the profit on every order as you log it.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlease read:\u003c\/strong\u003e This is a tracker tool only, not financial, tax, legal, medical or any other professional advice or advisory service. It records and calculates what you enter; you are solely responsible for checking all figures, rates, dates and results and for every decision you make. By purchasing, downloading or using it, you accept these terms (your statutory consumer rights are not affected).\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eEvery order, with its profit\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eEach order line shows the sale, the fee, what the product cost to make and the profit left, with the cost looked up for you from the Products tab.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFulfillment: every status counted, with the value still in your queue\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eA channel on every line, and what each channel earns\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCustomers: orders, units, spend and average for each one, read off the order list\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eOne file, actually connected\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eA product is entered once, on the Products tab. The recipe, the pricing calculator, the stock valuation and every order line all read that same row. Change one thing and everything that depends on it follows, with no copying a figure from one spreadsheet into another and hoping you remembered.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eTen connected tabs\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eProducts:\u003c\/strong\u003e 120 rows, the one place a product is entered\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaterials:\u003c\/strong\u003e 120 rows with the unit cost of each\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePricing:\u003c\/strong\u003e cost, suggested price, your price, and margin before and after fees\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eInventory:\u003c\/strong\u003e stock on hand, valued at cost and at retail\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOrders:\u003c\/strong\u003e 400 lines with profit per line\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSales:\u003c\/strong\u003e the year by month, with fees and postage taken off\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFulfilment:\u003c\/strong\u003e a shipping tracker with every status counted\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCustomers:\u003c\/strong\u003e a customer tracker built from the order list\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDashboard:\u003c\/strong\u003e six live figures and what each product did\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSetup and Start Here:\u003c\/strong\u003e setup takes a few minutes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhat it does for you\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePrices every product from its own recipe of materials\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAdds your labor rate and overhead per item automatically\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eShows the margin you actually keep after the platform's cut\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eValues your stock at cost and at retail\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlags anything below your reorder level, or below your target margin\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCharts that redraw from your own numbers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt doubles as a sales tracker and profit tracker for a small business. The filled copy holds a whole year of a working shop, so you can see how it behaves before you type anything.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWorks with\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMicrosoft Excel 2016, 2019, 2021 and Microsoft 365, on Windows and Mac, and LibreOffice. No Microsoft 365 subscription needed.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGoogle Sheets with a free Google account. You get real spreadsheet files, not a PDF with a link in it.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo add-ins, no macros and no subscription\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhat you download\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe Excel workbook, filled with a worked example\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe same workbook, blank and ready for your own numbers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe instruction guide, with one-click links to the Google Sheets versions (filled and blank)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe terms of use as a PDF\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eYour files are ready as soon as payment clears. The template is for use in your own business; please do not share or resell the files. Questions before or after you buy? Use our contact page and we will help.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I use it in Excel or Google Sheets?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eBoth. The Excel workbook runs in Excel 2016 or later on Windows and Mac, and the instruction guide holds two one-click links to the Google Sheets versions.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow many orders can it hold?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Orders tab has 400 lines, each showing the sale, the fee, the cost to make and the profit.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I track orders from more than one sales channel?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Every order line carries a channel, and the workbook shows what each channel earns.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow do I see what still needs to ship?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Fulfillment tab counts every status and shows the value still in your queue.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it keep a customer list?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The Customers tab reads orders, units, spend and average for each customer straight off the order list.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OPXVIA","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":67597861814366,"sku":"OPX-028","price":22.0,"currency_code":"CAD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0769\/2094\/6782\/files\/order-shipping-tracker-01.jpg?v=1790832083"},{"product_id":"photographer-bookkeeping-spreadsheet","title":"Photographer Bookkeeping Spreadsheet","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis photographer bookkeeping spreadsheet puts your shoots, albums and invoices in the same set of books. It is for photographers who want the client list, the invoices and the numbers in one file instead of three, and it works out your profit and tax set-aside as you go.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlease read:\u003c\/strong\u003e This is a tracker tool only, not financial, tax, legal, medical or any other professional advice or advisory service. It records and calculates what you enter; you are solely responsible for checking all figures, rates, dates and results and for every decision you make. By purchasing, downloading or using it, you accept these terms (your statutory consumer rights are not affected).\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eClients that add themselves up\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eA client is a name you type once. What they were billed, how many shoots they booked, the average job and when they last paid all calculate themselves from the ledger, so your client tracker and invoice tracker never fall out of step with the money.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eOne ledger, every report\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eYou enter money in on one tab and money out on another, pick a tax rate for each line, and everything else reads those two. The monthly view, the quarterly view, the profit and loss statement, the sales tax worksheet and the dashboard all recalculate. Nothing is typed twice, and no number on a report can disagree with the ledger it came from. Your income tracker, profit and loss and quarterly tax figures all come from the same two lists.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eSixteen connected tabs\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eTwo registers do the work and every other tab reports on them.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eIncome:\u003c\/strong\u003e 500 rows, with the tax split out on every line\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eExpenses:\u003c\/strong\u003e 500 rows, split the same way\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSetup:\u003c\/strong\u003e your categories, your tax rates and your set-aside percentage\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMonthly, Quarterly and Profit and Loss:\u003c\/strong\u003e all calculated\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSales Tax:\u003c\/strong\u003e collected against paid, by rate and by quarter\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eEstimated Tax:\u003c\/strong\u003e four quarterly set-asides at your own rate\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCustom Range:\u003c\/strong\u003e pick any two dates and everything follows\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eComparison:\u003c\/strong\u003e this year against last, month by month\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBalances:\u003c\/strong\u003e what each account took in and paid out\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDashboard:\u003c\/strong\u003e six live figures and the four quarters\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eStart Here:\u003c\/strong\u003e walks you through setup in a few minutes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eTwo years of demo data\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe filled copy holds two full years of demo data, so the comparison view has something real to compare. Click through a full photography year before you enter a single wedding or portrait session of your own.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWorks with\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMicrosoft Excel 2016, 2019, 2021 and Microsoft 365, on Windows and Mac, and LibreOffice. No Microsoft 365 subscription needed, and no Google account needed for the Excel files.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGoogle Sheets with a free Google account. You get real spreadsheet files, not a PDF with a link in it.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo add-ins, no macros, no subscription and no bank connection\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhat you download\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe Excel workbook, filled with a worked example\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe same workbook, blank and ready for your own numbers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe instruction guide, with one-click links to the Google Sheets versions (filled and blank)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe terms of use as a PDF\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eYour files are ready as soon as payment clears. The template is for use in your own business; please do not share or resell the files. Questions before or after you buy? Use our contact page and we will help.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it work in Excel and Google Sheets?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The Excel workbook runs in Excel 2016 or later on Windows and Mac with no Google account needed, and the instruction guide holds two one-click links to the Google Sheets versions.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I see what each client has paid me?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Type the client's name on each income line and billed, shoots, average and last paid calculate themselves.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it handle sales tax on my sessions?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Pick a tax rate per line and sales tax is split out, then netted against tax paid by rate and by quarter.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow much should I put aside for tax?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Estimated Tax tab turns your profit into four quarterly set-asides at the percentage you choose. It is a bookkeeping tool, not tax or accounting advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I compare this year with last year?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The Comparison tab sets this year against last, month by month, and Custom Range reports on any two dates.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OPXVIA","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":67597861978206,"sku":"OPX-033","price":29.0,"currency_code":"CAD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0769\/2094\/6782\/files\/photographer-bookkeeping-spreadsheet-01.jpg?v=1790832114"},{"product_id":"salon-barber-bookkeeping","title":"Salon and Barber Bookkeeping Spreadsheet","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis salon bookkeeping spreadsheet keeps services and retail properly apart in one set of books. It suits salons, barbers and any hairdresser who sells products as well as appointments and wants both in the same file.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlease read:\u003c\/strong\u003e This is a tracker tool only, not financial, tax, legal, medical or any other professional advice or advisory service. It records and calculates what you enter; you are solely responsible for checking all figures, rates, dates and results and for every decision you make. By purchasing, downloading or using it, you accept these terms (your statutory consumer rights are not affected).\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eServices and retail, split properly\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eService income and retail sales each get their own categories, so you can see which half of the chair actually earns. Both sit in the same ledger as your expenses, so the expense tracker and income tracker views always agree.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eOne ledger, every report\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eYou enter money in on one tab and money out on another, pick a tax rate for each line, and everything else reads those two. The monthly view, the quarterly view, the profit and loss statement, the sales tax worksheet and the dashboard all recalculate. Nothing is typed twice, and no number on a report can disagree with the ledger it came from. Sales tax on services and retail is split out per line, and the profit and loss shows each category's share.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFifteen connected tabs\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eTwo registers carry the data; every other tab reports on them.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eIncome:\u003c\/strong\u003e 500 rows, with the tax split out on every line\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eExpenses:\u003c\/strong\u003e 500 rows, split the same way\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSetup:\u003c\/strong\u003e your categories, your tax rates and your set-aside percentage\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMonthly, Quarterly and Profit and Loss:\u003c\/strong\u003e all calculated\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSales Tax:\u003c\/strong\u003e collected against paid, by rate and by quarter\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eEstimated Tax:\u003c\/strong\u003e four quarterly set-asides at your own rate\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCustom Range:\u003c\/strong\u003e pick any two dates and everything follows\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eComparison:\u003c\/strong\u003e this year against last, month by month\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBalances:\u003c\/strong\u003e what each account took in and paid out\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDashboard:\u003c\/strong\u003e six live figures and the four quarters\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eStart Here:\u003c\/strong\u003e walks you through setup in a few minutes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eTwo years of demo data\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe filled copy holds two full years of demo data, so the comparison view has something real to compare. You can see a full salon year working before you type in your own appointments.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWorks with\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMicrosoft Excel 2016, 2019, 2021 and Microsoft 365, on Windows and Mac, and LibreOffice. No Microsoft 365 subscription needed, and no Google account needed for the Excel files.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGoogle Sheets with a free Google account. You get real spreadsheet files, not a PDF with a link in it.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo add-ins, no macros, no subscription and no bank connection\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhat you download\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe Excel workbook, filled with a worked example\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe same workbook, blank and ready for your own numbers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe instruction guide, with one-click links to the Google Sheets versions (filled and blank)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe terms of use as a PDF\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eYour files are ready as soon as payment clears. The template is for use in your own business; please do not share or resell the files. Questions before or after you buy? Use our contact page and we will help.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it work in Excel and Google Sheets?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The Excel workbook runs in Excel 2016 or later on Windows and Mac with no Google account needed, and the instruction guide holds two one-click links to the Google Sheets versions.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I keep service income and retail sales apart?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. They are separate categories, so the profit and loss shows how much each one earns.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it handle sales tax?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Pick a tax rate on each line and the tax is split out automatically, then netted against tax paid by rate and by quarter.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow much should I put aside for tax?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Estimated Tax tab turns your profit into four quarterly set-asides at the percentage you choose. It is a bookkeeping tool, not tax or accounting advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I rename the categories for my salon?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The Setup tab holds your own categories, tax rates and set-aside percentage.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OPXVIA","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":67597862010974,"sku":"OPX-034","price":27.0,"currency_code":"CAD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0769\/2094\/6782\/files\/salon-barber-bookkeeping-01.jpg?v=1790832120"},{"product_id":"cleaning-business-bookkeeping","title":"Cleaning Business Bookkeeping Spreadsheet","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis cleaning business bookkeeping spreadsheet keeps domestic rounds and office contracts in one ledger. It is made for cleaners running both out of one van who want the money, the miles and the tax set-aside in a single file.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlease read:\u003c\/strong\u003e This is a tracker tool only, not financial, tax, legal, medical or any other professional advice or advisory service. It records and calculates what you enter; you are solely responsible for checking all figures, rates, dates and results and for every decision you make. By purchasing, downloading or using it, you accept these terms (your statutory consumer rights are not affected).\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eInvoices, miles and tax in one place\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eEvery invoice you raise feeds the same ledger the tax set-aside reads, and mileage is logged at your own rate. That keeps your invoice tracker, client tracker and mileage tracker lined up with the books, with no second spreadsheet to update.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eOne ledger, every report\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eYou enter money in on one tab and money out on another, pick a tax rate for each line, and everything else reads those two. The monthly view, the quarterly view, the profit and loss statement, the sales tax worksheet and the dashboard all recalculate. Nothing is typed twice, and no number on a report can disagree with the ledger it came from. The profit and loss shows each category's share, so you can see what a small business like yours really keeps.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eSixteen connected tabs\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eTwo registers do the work, and the rest of the file reports on them.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eIncome:\u003c\/strong\u003e 500 rows, with the tax split out on every line\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eExpenses:\u003c\/strong\u003e 500 rows, split the same way\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSetup:\u003c\/strong\u003e your categories, your tax rates and your set-aside percentage\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMonthly, Quarterly and Profit and Loss:\u003c\/strong\u003e all calculated\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSales Tax:\u003c\/strong\u003e collected against paid, by rate and by quarter\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eEstimated Tax:\u003c\/strong\u003e four quarterly set-asides at your own rate\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCustom Range:\u003c\/strong\u003e pick any two dates and everything follows\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eComparison:\u003c\/strong\u003e this year against last, month by month\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBalances:\u003c\/strong\u003e what each account took in and paid out\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDashboard:\u003c\/strong\u003e six live figures and the four quarters\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eStart Here:\u003c\/strong\u003e walks you through setup in a few minutes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eTwo years of demo data\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe filled copy holds two full years of demo data, so the comparison view has something real to compare. Click through a full year of a working cleaning business before you start your own.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWorks with\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMicrosoft Excel 2016, 2019, 2021 and Microsoft 365, on Windows and Mac, and LibreOffice. No Microsoft 365 subscription needed, and no Google account needed for the Excel files.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGoogle Sheets with a free Google account. You get real spreadsheet files, not a PDF with a link in it.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo add-ins, no macros, no subscription and no bank connection\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhat you download\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe Excel workbook, filled with a worked example\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe same workbook, blank and ready for your own numbers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe instruction guide, with one-click links to the Google Sheets versions (filled and blank)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe terms of use as a PDF\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eYour files are ready as soon as payment clears. The template is for use in your own business; please do not share or resell the files. Questions before or after you buy? Use our contact page and we will help.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it work in Excel and Google Sheets?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The Excel workbook runs in Excel 2016 or later on Windows and Mac with no Google account needed, and the instruction guide holds two one-click links to the Google Sheets versions.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I track domestic and office work separately?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Set up your own categories on the Setup tab, and the profit and loss shows each one's share.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it log mileage?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Mileage is logged at your own rate, alongside the invoices and expenses in the same ledger.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow much should I put aside for tax?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Estimated Tax tab turns your profit into four quarterly set-asides at the percentage you choose. It is a bookkeeping tool, not tax or accounting advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it handle sales tax?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Pick a tax rate on each line and the tax is split out, then netted against tax paid by rate and by quarter.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OPXVIA","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":67597862043742,"sku":"OPX-035","price":27.0,"currency_code":"CAD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0769\/2094\/6782\/files\/cleaning-business-bookkeeping-01.jpg?v=1790832125"},{"product_id":"personal-trainer-bookkeeping","title":"Personal Trainer Bookkeeping Spreadsheet","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis personal trainer bookkeeping spreadsheet bills 1:1 sessions, groups and online blocks from one client list. It is made for trainers and any fitness coach who wants three ways of earning in a single set of books.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlease read:\u003c\/strong\u003e This is a tracker tool only, not financial, tax, legal, medical or any other professional advice or advisory service. It records and calculates what you enter; you are solely responsible for checking all figures, rates, dates and results and for every decision you make. By purchasing, downloading or using it, you accept these terms (your statutory consumer rights are not affected).\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eThree ways of billing, one ledger\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eOne-to-one, group and online income all go into the same ledger, and the quarterly tax set-aside follows your real profit rather than four equal guesses. A quiet quarter sets aside less and a busy one more, so the figure matches the work you actually did.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eOne ledger, every report\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eYou enter money in on one tab and money out on another, pick a tax rate for each line, and everything else reads those two. The monthly view, the quarterly view, the profit and loss statement, the sales tax worksheet and the dashboard all recalculate. Nothing is typed twice, and no number on a report can disagree with the ledger it came from. Your client tracker, invoice tracker and income tracker are all views of the same two lists.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eSixteen connected tabs\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eTwo registers carry everything; the other tabs only report.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eIncome:\u003c\/strong\u003e 500 rows, with the tax split out on every line\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eExpenses:\u003c\/strong\u003e 500 rows, split the same way\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSetup:\u003c\/strong\u003e your categories, your tax rates and your set-aside percentage\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMonthly, Quarterly and Profit and Loss:\u003c\/strong\u003e all calculated\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSales Tax:\u003c\/strong\u003e collected against paid, by rate and by quarter\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eEstimated Tax:\u003c\/strong\u003e four quarterly set-asides at your own rate\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCustom Range:\u003c\/strong\u003e pick any two dates and everything follows\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eComparison:\u003c\/strong\u003e this year against last, month by month\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBalances:\u003c\/strong\u003e what each account took in and paid out\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDashboard:\u003c\/strong\u003e six live figures and the four quarters\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eStart Here:\u003c\/strong\u003e walks you through setup in a few minutes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eTwo years of demo data\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe filled copy holds two full years of demo data, so the comparison view has something real to compare. You can see a full training year working before you add your own clients.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWorks with\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMicrosoft Excel 2016, 2019, 2021 and Microsoft 365, on Windows and Mac, and LibreOffice. No Microsoft 365 subscription needed, and no Google account needed for the Excel files.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGoogle Sheets with a free Google account. You get real spreadsheet files, not a PDF with a link in it.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo add-ins, no macros, no subscription and no bank connection\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhat you download\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe Excel workbook, filled with a worked example\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe same workbook, blank and ready for your own numbers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe instruction guide, with one-click links to the Google Sheets versions (filled and blank)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe terms of use as a PDF\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eYour files are ready as soon as payment clears. The template is for use in your own business; please do not share or resell the files. Questions before or after you buy? Use our contact page and we will help.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it work in Excel and Google Sheets?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The Excel workbook runs in Excel 2016 or later on Windows and Mac with no Google account needed, and the instruction guide holds two one-click links to the Google Sheets versions.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I track 1:1, group and online clients together?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. All three go into one ledger as their own categories, read from one client list.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhy does my tax set-aside change each quarter?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eEach quarter reads your real profit, so a slower quarter sets aside less than a busy one, at the rate you choose.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it handle sales tax?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Pick a tax rate per line and the tax is split out and netted against tax paid by quarter.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I compare this year with last?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The Comparison tab sets this year against last, month by month.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OPXVIA","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":67597862240350,"sku":"OPX-036","price":27.0,"currency_code":"CAD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0769\/2094\/6782\/files\/personal-trainer-bookkeeping-01.jpg?v=1790832131"},{"product_id":"virtual-assistant-bookkeeping","title":"Virtual Assistant Bookkeeping Spreadsheet","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis virtual assistant bookkeeping spreadsheet handles retainers, hourly work and projects without three separate spreadsheets. It is for VAs juggling retainers, hourly tasks and set-up projects across several clients who want one clear set of books.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlease read:\u003c\/strong\u003e This is a tracker tool only, not financial, tax, legal, medical or any other professional advice or advisory service. It records and calculates what you enter; you are solely responsible for checking all figures, rates, dates and results and for every decision you make. By purchasing, downloading or using it, you accept these terms (your statutory consumer rights are not affected).\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eRetainer, hourly and project income, kept apart\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eRetainer, hourly and project income are separate categories, so you can see which kind of work actually pays. For a VA business, or any freelancer selling time in more than one way, that answer is the start of better pricing.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eOne ledger, every report\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eYou enter money in on one tab and money out on another, pick a tax rate for each line, and everything else reads those two. The monthly view, the quarterly view, the profit and loss statement, the sales tax worksheet and the dashboard all recalculate. Nothing is typed twice, and no number on a report can disagree with the ledger it came from. Your client tracker and invoice tracker are read from the same ledger, and the profit and loss shows each income type's share.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eSixteen connected tabs\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eTwo registers do the work, and every other tab reports on them.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eIncome:\u003c\/strong\u003e 500 rows, with the tax split out on every line\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eExpenses:\u003c\/strong\u003e 500 rows, split the same way\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSetup:\u003c\/strong\u003e your categories, your tax rates and your set-aside percentage\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMonthly, Quarterly and Profit and Loss:\u003c\/strong\u003e all calculated\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSales Tax:\u003c\/strong\u003e collected against paid, by rate and by quarter\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eEstimated Tax:\u003c\/strong\u003e four quarterly set-asides at your own rate\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCustom Range:\u003c\/strong\u003e pick any two dates and everything follows\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eComparison:\u003c\/strong\u003e this year against last, month by month\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBalances:\u003c\/strong\u003e what each account took in and paid out\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDashboard:\u003c\/strong\u003e six live figures and the four quarters\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eStart Here:\u003c\/strong\u003e walks you through setup in a few minutes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eTwo years of demo data\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe filled copy holds two full years of demo data, so the comparison view has something real to compare. Click through a full VA year before you enter your own clients.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWorks with\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMicrosoft Excel 2016, 2019, 2021 and Microsoft 365, on Windows and Mac, and LibreOffice. No Microsoft 365 subscription needed, and no Google account needed for the Excel files.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGoogle Sheets with a free Google account. You get real spreadsheet files, not a PDF with a link in it.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo add-ins, no macros, no subscription and no bank connection\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhat you download\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe Excel workbook, filled with a worked example\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe same workbook, blank and ready for your own numbers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe instruction guide, with one-click links to the Google Sheets versions (filled and blank)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe terms of use as a PDF\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eYour files are ready as soon as payment clears. The template is for use in your own business; please do not share or resell the files. Questions before or after you buy? Use our contact page and we will help.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it work in Excel and Google Sheets?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The Excel workbook runs in Excel 2016 or later on Windows and Mac with no Google account needed, and the instruction guide holds two one-click links to the Google Sheets versions.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I see which type of work pays best?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Retainer, hourly and project income are separate categories, and the profit and loss shows the share of each.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it work for several clients?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Every income line carries the client, and all reports read from the same ledger.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow much should I put aside for tax?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Estimated Tax tab turns your profit into four quarterly set-asides at the percentage you choose. It is a bookkeeping tool, not tax or accounting advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it handle sales tax or VAT on my invoices?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003ePick a tax rate on each line and the tax is split out, then netted against tax paid by rate and by quarter.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OPXVIA","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":67597862273118,"sku":"OPX-037","price":27.0,"currency_code":"CAD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0769\/2094\/6782\/files\/virtual-assistant-bookkeeping-01.jpg?v=1790832136"},{"product_id":"bakery-business-bookkeeping","title":"Bakery Bookkeeping Spreadsheet","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis bakery bookkeeping spreadsheet costs cakes, market stalls and wholesale orders properly. It is made for the home baker pricing cakes, working markets and supplying cafes, who wants every sale and every cost in one set of books.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlease read:\u003c\/strong\u003e This is a tracker tool only, not financial, tax, legal, medical or any other professional advice or advisory service. It records and calculates what you enter; you are solely responsible for checking all figures, rates, dates and results and for every decision you make. By purchasing, downloading or using it, you accept these terms (your statutory consumer rights are not affected).\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eCosts on their own lines\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eIngredients, decoration and packaging are separate lines, so the price of a cake is a number rather than a feeling. In a cake business those three move independently, and keeping them apart is what makes the profit and loss worth reading. Every ingredient and packaging purchase goes through the same expense tracker as the rest of the books.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eOne ledger, every report\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eYou enter money in on one tab and money out on another, pick a tax rate for each line, and everything else reads those two. The monthly view, the quarterly view, the profit and loss statement, the sales tax worksheet and the dashboard all recalculate. Nothing is typed twice, and no number on a report can disagree with the ledger it came from. Sales tax is split out of every line and netted quarter by quarter.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFifteen connected tabs\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eTwo registers do the work; everything else reports on them.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eIncome:\u003c\/strong\u003e 500 rows, with the tax split out on every line\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eExpenses:\u003c\/strong\u003e 500 rows, split the same way\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSetup:\u003c\/strong\u003e your categories, your tax rates and your set-aside percentage\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMonthly, Quarterly and Profit and Loss:\u003c\/strong\u003e all calculated\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSales Tax:\u003c\/strong\u003e collected against paid, by rate and by quarter\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eEstimated Tax:\u003c\/strong\u003e four quarterly set-asides at your own rate\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCustom Range:\u003c\/strong\u003e pick any two dates and everything follows\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eComparison:\u003c\/strong\u003e this year against last, month by month\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBalances:\u003c\/strong\u003e what each account took in and paid out\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDashboard:\u003c\/strong\u003e six live figures and the four quarters\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eStart Here:\u003c\/strong\u003e walks you through setup in a few minutes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eTwo years of demo data\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe filled copy holds two full years of demo data, so the comparison view has something real to compare. You can see a full baking year working before you enter your own orders.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWorks with\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMicrosoft Excel 2016, 2019, 2021 and Microsoft 365, on Windows and Mac, and LibreOffice. No Microsoft 365 subscription needed, and no Google account needed for the Excel files.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGoogle Sheets with a free Google account. You get real spreadsheet files, not a PDF with a link in it.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo add-ins, no macros, no subscription and no bank connection\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhat you download\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe Excel workbook, filled with a worked example\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe same workbook, blank and ready for your own numbers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe instruction guide, with one-click links to the Google Sheets versions (filled and blank)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe terms of use as a PDF\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eYour files are ready as soon as payment clears. The template is for use in your own business; please do not share or resell the files. Questions before or after you buy? Use our contact page and we will help.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it work in Excel and Google Sheets?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The Excel workbook runs in Excel 2016 or later on Windows and Mac with no Google account needed, and the instruction guide holds two one-click links to the Google Sheets versions.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I see what my ingredients and packaging cost?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Ingredients, decoration and packaging are separate expense lines, and the profit and loss shows each one's share.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I track markets and wholesale separately?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Set up your own categories on the Setup tab and every report follows them.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow much should I put aside for tax?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Estimated Tax tab turns your profit into four quarterly set-asides at the percentage you choose. It is a bookkeeping tool, not tax or accounting advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it handle sales tax?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Pick a tax rate on each line and the tax splits itself out, then nets against tax paid by rate and by quarter.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OPXVIA","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":67597862305886,"sku":"OPX-038","price":27.0,"currency_code":"CAD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0769\/2094\/6782\/files\/bakery-business-bookkeeping-01.jpg?v=1790832142"},{"product_id":"food-truck-bookkeeping-spreadsheet","title":"Food Truck Bookkeeping Spreadsheet","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis food truck bookkeeping spreadsheet keeps daily takings, pitch fees and event bookings in one set of books. It is built for food trucks and caterers who want to see, line by line and month by month, what the business actually keeps.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlease read:\u003c\/strong\u003e This is a tracker tool only, not financial, tax, legal, medical or any other professional advice or advisory service. It records and calculates what you enter; you are solely responsible for checking all figures, rates, dates and results and for every decision you make. By purchasing, downloading or using it, you accept these terms (your statutory consumer rights are not affected).\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003ePitch fees you can see\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003ePitch fees get their own expense category, so a pitch that never pays for itself shows up as a number instead of hiding inside general costs. For a catering business with event bookings on top of street trading, that is usually the first question worth answering.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eTwo registers, everything else calculated\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eMoney in goes on one tab and money out on another, and you pick a tax rate for each line. The monthly view, the quarterly view, the profit and loss statement, the sales tax worksheet and the dashboard all read those two registers and recalculate. Nothing is typed twice, so no report can disagree with the ledger behind it.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003e16 connected tabs\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe workbook is split into these connected tabs, each reading the same two registers:\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eIncome:\u003c\/strong\u003e 500 rows, with the tax split out on every line\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eExpenses:\u003c\/strong\u003e 500 rows, split the same way\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSetup:\u003c\/strong\u003e your categories, your tax rates and your set-aside percentage\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMonthly, Quarterly and Profit \u0026amp; Loss:\u003c\/strong\u003e all calculated, nothing typed\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSales Tax:\u003c\/strong\u003e collected against paid, by rate and by quarter\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eEstimated Tax:\u003c\/strong\u003e four quarterly set-asides at your own rate\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCustom Range:\u003c\/strong\u003e pick any two dates and every figure follows\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eComparison:\u003c\/strong\u003e this year against last, month by month\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBalances:\u003c\/strong\u003e what each account took in and paid out\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDashboard:\u003c\/strong\u003e six live figures and the four quarters\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eStart Here:\u003c\/strong\u003e setup in a few minutes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Estimated Tax tab gives you four quarterly tax set-asides at the rate you choose, which makes the quarterly tax bill something you plan for rather than react to. Use it as an expense tracker day to day and as a year-end summary when you need one.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eReal files, filled and blank\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eYou get real spreadsheet files, not a PDF with a link in it: Excel and Google Sheets, each filled with a worked example and each blank and ready for your own numbers. The filled copy is the file in the photos, with two full years of demo data so the Comparison tab has something real to compare.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWorks with\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMicrosoft Excel 2016, 2019, 2021 and Microsoft 365, on Windows and Mac, and LibreOffice. No Microsoft 365 subscription required.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGoogle Sheets with a free Google account. No Google account is needed for the Excel files.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo add-ins, no macros, no subscription and no bank connection\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhat you download\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe Excel workbook filled with a worked example, and the same workbook blank and ready for yours\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe instruction guide, which has one-click links to the Google Sheets versions (filled and blank)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe terms of use as a PDF\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eYour files are ready to download as soon as payment clears. The Start Here tab walks you through setup in a few minutes. The files are for use in your own business; please do not share or resell them. Questions before or after you buy? Use our contact page and we will help.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes this work in Excel or Google Sheets?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eBoth. You download Excel files that run on Excel 2016 or later on Windows and Mac, and the instruction guide has one-click links to make your own copy in Google Sheets with a free Google account.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhere do pitch fees go?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003ePitch fees have their own expense category, so you can see what each pitch costs against what it brings in rather than lumping it into general costs.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it handle sales tax at more than one rate?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. You pick a tax rate on every income and expense line, and the Sales Tax tab shows tax collected against tax paid by rate and by quarter.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I compare this year with last year?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The Comparison tab sets this year against last, month by month, and the filled copy ships with two years of demo data so you can see it working.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it connect to my bank or card reader?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. There is no bank connection, no add-ins and no macros. You type or paste your income and expenses into the two registers.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OPXVIA","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":67597862338654,"sku":"OPX-039","price":27.0,"currency_code":"CAD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0769\/2094\/6782\/files\/food-truck-bookkeeping-spreadsheet-01.jpg?v=1790832148"},{"product_id":"landscaping-business-bookkeeping-spreadsheet","title":"Landscaping Business Bookkeeping Spreadsheet","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis landscaping bookkeeping spreadsheet puts a weekly round and larger project work into the same books. It suits gardeners, landscapers and lawn care business owners who want a clear profit and loss without paying for accounting software.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlease read:\u003c\/strong\u003e This is a tracker tool only, not financial, tax, legal, medical or any other professional advice or advisory service. It records and calculates what you enter; you are solely responsible for checking all figures, rates, dates and results and for every decision you make. By purchasing, downloading or using it, you accept these terms (your statutory consumer rights are not affected).\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eMaterials, on-charged or absorbed\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eMaterials you pass on to the client are tracked separately from materials you absorb yourself. That split is where many garden jobs quietly lose money, and here it is visible on every line.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eHow the books fit together\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eYou record money in on the Income tab and money out on the Expenses tab, choosing a tax rate on each line. Everything else reads those two registers: the monthly and quarterly views, the profit and loss statement, the sales tax worksheet and the dashboard. Nothing is entered twice, so the reports always agree with the ledger.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003e16 connected tabs\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eEvery tab below works from the same two registers, so it doubles as an income tracker and an expense tracker for the year:\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eIncome:\u003c\/strong\u003e 500 rows, with the tax split out on every line\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eExpenses:\u003c\/strong\u003e 500 rows, split the same way\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSetup:\u003c\/strong\u003e your categories, your tax rates and your set-aside percentage\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMonthly, Quarterly and Profit \u0026amp; Loss:\u003c\/strong\u003e all calculated, nothing typed\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSales Tax:\u003c\/strong\u003e collected against paid, by rate and by quarter\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eEstimated Tax:\u003c\/strong\u003e four quarterly set-asides at your own rate\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCustom Range:\u003c\/strong\u003e pick any two dates and every figure follows\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eComparison:\u003c\/strong\u003e this year against last, month by month\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBalances:\u003c\/strong\u003e what each account took in and paid out\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDashboard:\u003c\/strong\u003e six live figures and the four quarters\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eStart Here:\u003c\/strong\u003e setup in a few minutes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eReal files, filled and blank\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eYou get real spreadsheet files, not a PDF with a link in it: Excel and Google Sheets, each filled with a worked example and each blank and ready for your own numbers. The filled copy is the file in the photos, with two full years of demo data so the Comparison tab has something real to compare.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt is a straightforward small business ledger: no invoicing software to learn, and the Start Here tab shows you where to begin.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWorks with\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMicrosoft Excel 2016, 2019, 2021 and Microsoft 365, on Windows and Mac, and LibreOffice. No Microsoft 365 subscription required.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGoogle Sheets with a free Google account. No Google account is needed for the Excel files.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo add-ins, no macros, no subscription and no bank connection\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhat you download\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe Excel workbook filled with a worked example, and the same workbook blank and ready for yours\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe instruction guide, which has one-click links to the Google Sheets versions (filled and blank)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe terms of use as a PDF\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eYour files are ready to download as soon as payment clears. The Start Here tab walks you through setup in a few minutes. The files are for use in your own business; please do not share or resell them. Questions before or after you buy? Use our contact page and we will help.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I use it in Google Sheets instead of Excel?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The download includes Excel files for Excel 2016 or later on Windows and Mac, and the instruction guide has one-click links to make your own Google Sheets copy with a free Google account.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow does it handle materials I charge back to the client?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eOn-charged materials are tracked separately from materials you absorb, so you can see where a job is losing money on materials.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I see a single quarter or a custom period?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The Quarterly tab shows each quarter, and the Custom Range tab recalculates everything for any two dates you choose.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it set money aside for tax?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Estimated Tax tab works out four quarterly set-asides at the rate you enter on Setup. It does not tell you what rate to use.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDo I need Microsoft 365?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. It runs on Excel 2016, 2019, 2021 or 365 and on LibreOffice, with no macros or add-ins.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OPXVIA","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":67597862371422,"sku":"OPX-040","price":27.0,"currency_code":"CAD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0769\/2094\/6782\/files\/landscaping-business-bookkeeping-spreadsheet-01.jpg?v=1790832154"},{"product_id":"amazon-fba-seller-profit-tracker","title":"Amazon Seller Profit Tracker Spreadsheet","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis Amazon seller profit tracker separates FBA fees, referral fees and advertising from the money you actually keep. It is for FBA sellers who want a plain bookkeeping template that shows real margin, not the figure before costs.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlease read:\u003c\/strong\u003e This is a tracker tool only, not financial, tax, legal, medical or any other professional advice or advisory service. It records and calculates what you enter; you are solely responsible for checking all figures, rates, dates and results and for every decision you make. By purchasing, downloading or using it, you accept these terms (your statutory consumer rights are not affected).\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFees and ads on their own lines\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eFBA fees, referral fees and sponsored-product spend each get their own expense category. The margin you see on the profit and loss is the margin you keep, and you can tell at a glance which of the three is growing.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eEnter it once\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eSales go on the Income tab, costs on the Expenses tab, with a tax rate picked for each line. The monthly and quarterly views, the profit and loss, the sales tax worksheet and the dashboard all recalculate from those two registers, so no report can drift away from the ledger.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003e15 connected tabs\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eFifteen connected tabs make up the workbook. The main ones:\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eIncome:\u003c\/strong\u003e 500 rows, with the tax split out on every line\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eExpenses:\u003c\/strong\u003e 500 rows, split the same way\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSetup:\u003c\/strong\u003e your categories, your tax rates and your set-aside percentage\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMonthly, Quarterly and Profit \u0026amp; Loss:\u003c\/strong\u003e all calculated, nothing typed\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSales Tax:\u003c\/strong\u003e collected against paid, by rate and by quarter\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eEstimated Tax:\u003c\/strong\u003e four quarterly set-asides at your own rate\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCustom Range:\u003c\/strong\u003e pick any two dates and every figure follows\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eComparison:\u003c\/strong\u003e this year against last, month by month\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBalances:\u003c\/strong\u003e what each account took in and paid out\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDashboard:\u003c\/strong\u003e six live figures and the four quarters\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eStart Here:\u003c\/strong\u003e setup in a few minutes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eReal files, filled and blank\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eYou get real spreadsheet files, not a PDF with a link in it: Excel and Google Sheets, each filled with a worked example and each blank and ready for your own numbers. The filled copy is the file in the photos, with two full years of demo data so the Comparison tab has something real to compare.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt is a bookkeeping file for an ecommerce seller, not a connection to your seller account: you enter or paste the figures from your own statements.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWorks with\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMicrosoft Excel 2016, 2019, 2021 and Microsoft 365, on Windows and Mac, and LibreOffice. No Microsoft 365 subscription required.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGoogle Sheets with a free Google account. No Google account is needed for the Excel files.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo add-ins, no macros, no subscription and no bank connection\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhat you download\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe Excel workbook filled with a worked example, and the same workbook blank and ready for yours\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe instruction guide, which has one-click links to the Google Sheets versions (filled and blank)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe terms of use as a PDF\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eYour files are ready to download as soon as payment clears. The Start Here tab walks you through setup in a few minutes. The files are for use in your own business; please do not share or resell them. Questions before or after you buy? Use our contact page and we will help.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it work in Excel and Google Sheets?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. You get Excel files for Excel 2016 or later on Windows and Mac, and the instruction guide has one-click links to make Google Sheets copies with a free Google account.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I track FBA fees separately from ad spend?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. FBA fees, referral fees and sponsored-product spend each have their own expense category, so each shows up on its own line in the reports.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it pull data from my seller account?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. There is no account or bank connection and no add-ins. You enter your income and expenses on the two registers and everything else calculates.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow many transactions does it hold?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Income and Expenses tabs have 500 rows each.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I see last year against this year?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The Comparison tab shows this year against last, month by month, and the filled copy includes two full years of demo data.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OPXVIA","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":67597862436958,"sku":"OPX-041","price":29.0,"currency_code":"CAD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0769\/2094\/6782\/files\/amazon-fba-seller-profit-tracker-01.jpg?v=1790832159"},{"product_id":"shopify-store-bookkeeping-spreadsheet","title":"Shopify Bookkeeping Spreadsheet","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis Shopify bookkeeping spreadsheet shows app fees, ad spend and postage against the margin your online store actually earns. It is for Shopify owners who want simple books they control, with costs broken out instead of lumped together.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlease read:\u003c\/strong\u003e This is a tracker tool only, not financial, tax, legal, medical or any other professional advice or advisory service. It records and calculates what you enter; you are solely responsible for checking all figures, rates, dates and results and for every decision you make. By purchasing, downloading or using it, you accept these terms (your statutory consumer rights are not affected).\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFive cost lines, not one lump\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eYour store subscription, apps, ads, gateway fees and postage are five separate expense lines rather than one figure called expenses. When margin slips, you can see which of them moved.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eTwo registers drive the rest\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eMoney in is entered on one tab and money out on another, each line with its own tax rate. The monthly view, the quarterly view, the profit and loss, the sales tax worksheet and the dashboard all read from those two, so nothing is typed twice and every report matches the ledger.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003e15 connected tabs\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe workbook has fifteen connected tabs, working as an income tracker and expense tracker in one:\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eIncome:\u003c\/strong\u003e 500 rows, with the tax split out on every line\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eExpenses:\u003c\/strong\u003e 500 rows, split the same way\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSetup:\u003c\/strong\u003e your categories, your tax rates and your set-aside percentage\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMonthly, Quarterly and Profit \u0026amp; Loss:\u003c\/strong\u003e all calculated, nothing typed\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSales Tax:\u003c\/strong\u003e collected against paid, by rate and by quarter\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eEstimated Tax:\u003c\/strong\u003e four quarterly set-asides at your own rate\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCustom Range:\u003c\/strong\u003e pick any two dates and every figure follows\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eComparison:\u003c\/strong\u003e this year against last, month by month\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBalances:\u003c\/strong\u003e what each account took in and paid out\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDashboard:\u003c\/strong\u003e six live figures and the four quarters\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eStart Here:\u003c\/strong\u003e setup in a few minutes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eReal files, filled and blank\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eYou get real spreadsheet files, not a PDF with a link in it: Excel and Google Sheets, each filled with a worked example and each blank and ready for your own numbers. The filled copy is the file in the photos, with two full years of demo data so the Comparison tab has something real to compare.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt suits any small ecommerce business that sells through its own store and wants year-end figures ready without extra software.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWorks with\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMicrosoft Excel 2016, 2019, 2021 and Microsoft 365, on Windows and Mac, and LibreOffice. No Microsoft 365 subscription required.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGoogle Sheets with a free Google account. No Google account is needed for the Excel files.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo add-ins, no macros, no subscription and no bank connection\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhat you download\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe Excel workbook filled with a worked example, and the same workbook blank and ready for yours\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe instruction guide, which has one-click links to the Google Sheets versions (filled and blank)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe terms of use as a PDF\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eYour files are ready to download as soon as payment clears. The Start Here tab walks you through setup in a few minutes. The files are for use in your own business; please do not share or resell them. Questions before or after you buy? Use our contact page and we will help.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I use it in Google Sheets?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Along with the Excel files, the instruction guide has one-click links to make your own Google Sheets copies with a free Google account.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it connect to my Shopify store?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. It has no store or bank connection, no add-ins and no macros. You enter or paste your figures on the Income and Expenses tabs.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhich store costs are tracked separately?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eSubscription, apps, ads, gateway fees and postage each have their own expense line, so each one is visible against your margin.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it handle sales tax?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYou choose a tax rate on every line, and the Sales Tax tab shows tax collected against tax paid by rate and by quarter.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat Excel version do I need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eExcel 2016, 2019, 2021 or Microsoft 365 on Windows or Mac, or LibreOffice. No Microsoft 365 subscription is required.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OPXVIA","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":67597862469726,"sku":"OPX-042","price":29.0,"currency_code":"CAD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0769\/2094\/6782\/files\/shopify-store-bookkeeping-spreadsheet-01.jpg?v=1790832165"},{"product_id":"print-on-demand-bookkeeping-spreadsheet","title":"Print on Demand Seller Bookkeeping Spreadsheet","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis print on demand bookkeeping spreadsheet shows your real margin after fulfillment, not the figure before it. It is made for POD sellers who want to know what each sale leaves once the printing and shipping partner has been paid.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlease read:\u003c\/strong\u003e This is a tracker tool only, not financial, tax, legal, medical or any other professional advice or advisory service. It records and calculates what you enter; you are solely responsible for checking all figures, rates, dates and results and for every decision you make. By purchasing, downloading or using it, you accept these terms (your statutory consumer rights are not affected).\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFulfillment cost on its own line\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eFulfillment cost is a category of its own, so the gap between a sale and what you keep stops being a surprise at the end of the month. Used as a profit tracker, it shows that gap every month and every quarter.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eOne entry per line\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eEvery sale goes on the Income tab and every cost on the Expenses tab, with a tax rate chosen per line. The monthly and quarterly views, profit and loss, sales tax worksheet and dashboard all calculate from those two registers. Nothing is retyped, and no report can contradict the ledger.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003e15 connected tabs\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eFifteen connected tabs sit behind the dashboard:\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eIncome:\u003c\/strong\u003e 500 rows, with the tax split out on every line\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eExpenses:\u003c\/strong\u003e 500 rows, split the same way\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSetup:\u003c\/strong\u003e your categories, your tax rates and your set-aside percentage\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMonthly, Quarterly and Profit \u0026amp; Loss:\u003c\/strong\u003e all calculated, nothing typed\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSales Tax:\u003c\/strong\u003e collected against paid, by rate and by quarter\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eEstimated Tax:\u003c\/strong\u003e four quarterly set-asides at your own rate\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCustom Range:\u003c\/strong\u003e pick any two dates and every figure follows\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eComparison:\u003c\/strong\u003e this year against last, month by month\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBalances:\u003c\/strong\u003e what each account took in and paid out\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDashboard:\u003c\/strong\u003e six live figures and the four quarters\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eStart Here:\u003c\/strong\u003e setup in a few minutes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eReal files, filled and blank\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eYou get real spreadsheet files, not a PDF with a link in it: Excel and Google Sheets, each filled with a worked example and each blank and ready for your own numbers. The filled copy is the file in the photos, with two full years of demo data so the Comparison tab has something real to compare.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt is a small business ledger with no marketplace connection: you enter the figures from your own payouts and invoices.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWorks with\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMicrosoft Excel 2016, 2019, 2021 and Microsoft 365, on Windows and Mac, and LibreOffice. No Microsoft 365 subscription required.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGoogle Sheets with a free Google account. No Google account is needed for the Excel files.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo add-ins, no macros, no subscription and no bank connection\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhat you download\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe Excel workbook filled with a worked example, and the same workbook blank and ready for yours\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe instruction guide, which has one-click links to the Google Sheets versions (filled and blank)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe terms of use as a PDF\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eYour files are ready to download as soon as payment clears. The Start Here tab walks you through setup in a few minutes. The files are for use in your own business; please do not share or resell them. Questions before or after you buy? Use our contact page and we will help.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it work in both Excel and Google Sheets?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. You download Excel files for Excel 2016 or later, and the instruction guide has one-click links to make Google Sheets copies with a free Google account.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow is fulfillment cost handled?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eFulfillment cost has its own expense category, so the profit and loss and dashboard show what you keep after it is paid.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it import orders from my shop or POD partner?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. There is no connection to any platform or bank, and no add-ins or macros. You enter or paste your figures on the two registers.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I set money aside for tax?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Estimated Tax tab calculates four quarterly set-asides at the rate you choose on Setup.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs there a filled example to learn from?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The filled copy is the file shown in the photos, with two full years of demo data, and a blank copy comes with it.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OPXVIA","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":67597862502494,"sku":"OPX-043","price":27.0,"currency_code":"CAD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0769\/2094\/6782\/files\/print-on-demand-bookkeeping-spreadsheet-01.jpg?v=1790832170"},{"product_id":"recipe-cost-calculator-spreadsheet","title":"Recipe Cost Calculator Spreadsheet","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis recipe cost calculator tells you what a meal actually costs before you cook it, per recipe and per serving. It is for home cooks, a home baker selling bakes, or anyone who wants food cost in numbers rather than guesses.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlease read:\u003c\/strong\u003e This is a tracker tool only, not financial, tax, legal, medical or any other professional advice or advisory service. It records and calculates what you enter; you are solely responsible for checking all figures, rates, dates and results and for every decision you make. By purchasing, downloading or using it, you accept these terms (your statutory consumer rights are not affected).\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eThe dashboard\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eNothing on the dashboard is typed. Choose all recipes or any one, and the cards, cost and batch follow it.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFive live cards: recipe cost, cost a serving, selling price, margin and batch profit\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWhere the cost goes: each ingredient's share of a recipe's cost, dearest first\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBest margins, with every serving's price split into cost and profit\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePrices that moved since the last price, and the recipes hit hardest\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMargin against target, turning red when a recipe keeps less than you aim for\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eA batch calculator: how many a batch makes, what it costs, sells for and leaves you\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePrice to hit your margin, for recipes under your target\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAverage cost against average price by kind of recipe: breakfasts, dinners, bakes and more\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eChange one price, everything follows\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003ePrice an ingredient once and every recipe using it re-costs itself, per recipe and per serving, so a cheap-looking dish that serves two is never mistaken for one that serves four. Every figure on the dashboard is calculated from the tabs behind it. Nothing is typed into a summary, so the front page can never disagree with the rows it came from.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhat is included\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eRecipes:\u003c\/strong\u003e eighty recipes with meal type, minutes, cost per recipe and cost per serving\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eRecipe lines:\u003c\/strong\u003e four hundred lines of ingredient and quantity, with the unit pulled through and how many recipes use each ingredient\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMeal plan:\u003c\/strong\u003e put recipes on the week and see the cost of the week\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eShopping list:\u003c\/strong\u003e builds itself from the week, with the pantry subtracted, so it doubles as your grocery list\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDashboard:\u003c\/strong\u003e live\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eNine connected tabs in all, every one reading the same source list, so the meal planner and the costing never disagree.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eYou get real spreadsheet files, not a PDF with a link in it: Excel and Google Sheets, each filled in and each blank and ready for yours. The filled copy is the file in the photos, so you can see how it behaves before you type anything.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWorks with\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMicrosoft Excel 2016, 2019, 2021 and Microsoft 365, on Windows and Mac, and LibreOffice. No Microsoft 365 subscription required.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGoogle Sheets with a free Google account. No Google account is needed for the Excel files.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo add-ins, no macros and no subscription\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhat you download\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe Excel workbook filled with a worked example, and the same workbook blank and ready for yours\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe instruction guide, which has one-click links to the Google Sheets versions (filled and blank)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe terms of use as a PDF\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eYour files are ready to download as soon as payment clears. The files are for personal use on your own devices; please do not share or resell them. Questions before or after you buy? Use our contact page and we will help.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I use it in Excel or Google Sheets?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eBoth. You download Excel workbooks for Excel 2016 or later on Windows and Mac, and the instruction guide has one-click links to the Google Sheets versions (filled and blank).\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat happens when an ingredient price changes?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eChange it once and every recipe that uses it re-costs itself. The dashboard also shows which prices moved and which recipes were hit hardest.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I work out a selling price for my bakes?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Set a selling price and a target margin; recipes below target turn red, and the dashboard shows the price that would reach your margin.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow many recipes does it hold?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eEighty recipes and four hundred recipe lines.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it make a shopping list?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Put recipes on the week and the shopping list builds itself, with what you already have in the pantry subtracted.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OPXVIA","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":67597863583838,"sku":"OPX-057","price":22.0,"currency_code":"CAD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0769\/2094\/6782\/files\/recipe-cost-calculator-spreadsheet-01.jpg?v=1790832253"},{"product_id":"mileage-log-expense-tracker","title":"Mileage and Expense Log Spreadsheet","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis mileage log values every business trip at your own rate, in the same file as the rest of your books. It is for anyone self employed who claims mileage and would rather not reconcile a separate app at the end of the year.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlease read:\u003c\/strong\u003e This is a tracker tool only, not financial, tax, legal, medical or any other professional advice or advisory service. It records and calculates what you enter; you are solely responsible for checking all figures, rates, dates and results and for every decision you make. By purchasing, downloading or using it, you accept these terms (your statutory consumer rights are not affected).\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eOne rate, every trip valued\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eSet your rate once on Setup. Each trip is logged with its date, purpose and distance, and its value is worked out on the line. The Mileage tab totals distance logged and what it is worth at your rate, and it sits beside the expense ledger rather than in a separate tool. Every figure on the dashboard is calculated from the tabs behind it, and nothing is typed into a summary, so the front page always agrees with the rows it came from.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eEleven connected tabs\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eEvery tab reads the same source list, so nothing is entered twice. Alongside the 200-trip mileage tracker you get a full ledger of 1,000 rows:\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThe ledger:\u003c\/strong\u003e Income and Expenses, 500 rows each, with the tax split out per line, your own categories and account balances\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThe tax:\u003c\/strong\u003e sales tax by quarter and by rate, quarterly set-asides, and mileage valued at your rate\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThe reporting:\u003c\/strong\u003e profit and loss, monthly and quarterly views, any date range, this year against last, and a live dashboard\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eThat makes it a complete expense tracker for business expenses as well: the profit and loss and the quarterly set-asides are ready when you need them, and the comparison view shows this year against last.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eYou get real spreadsheet files, not a PDF with a link in it: Excel and Google Sheets, each filled in and each blank and ready for yours. The filled copy is the file in the photos, so you can see how it behaves before you type anything.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWorks with\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMicrosoft Excel 2016, 2019, 2021 and Microsoft 365, on Windows and Mac, and LibreOffice. No Microsoft 365 subscription required.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGoogle Sheets with a free Google account. No Google account is needed for the Excel files.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo add-ins, no macros and no subscription\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhat you download\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe Excel workbook filled with a worked example, and the same workbook blank and ready for yours\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe instruction guide, which has one-click links to the Google Sheets versions (filled and blank)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe terms of use as a PDF\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eYour files are ready to download as soon as payment clears. The Start Here tab walks you through setup in a few minutes. The files are for personal use on your own devices; please do not share or resell them. Questions before or after you buy? Use our contact page and we will help.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it work in Excel or Google Sheets?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eBoth. You download Excel files for Excel 2016 or later on Windows and Mac, and the instruction guide has one-click links to make Google Sheets copies with a free Google account.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I set my own mileage rate?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. You enter one rate on Setup and every trip is valued at it. The file does not decide what rate you can claim.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow many trips can I log?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe mileage log holds 200 trips, and the income and expense ledger holds 1,000 rows.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it track my other business costs too?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Income and expenses each have 500 rows, with tax split out per line, and they feed the profit and loss, quarterly views and dashboard.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it use GPS or connect to my phone?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. You type each trip yourself. There are no add-ins, no macros and no subscription.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OPXVIA","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":67597863616606,"sku":"OPX-058","price":20.0,"currency_code":"CAD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0769\/2094\/6782\/files\/mileage-log-expense-tracker-01.jpg?v=1790832258"},{"product_id":"contractor-payment-1099-tracker","title":"Contractor Payment and 1099 Tracker Spreadsheet","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis 1099 tracker records who you paid, how much and when, so you can see which contractors crossed the threshold. It is for any small business that pays contractors and needs those totals ready at year end.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlease read:\u003c\/strong\u003e This is a tracker tool only, not financial, tax, legal, medical or any other professional advice or advisory service. It records and calculates what you enter; you are solely responsible for checking all figures, rates, dates and results and for every decision you make. By purchasing, downloading or using it, you accept these terms (your statutory consumer rights are not affected).\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eType a name once\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eEach contractor is a name you type once. Paid to date, job count, average payment and last paid all calculate themselves from the ledger, for up to 60 contractors. Whether you pay a single subcontractor or a regular crew, the totals stay current. Every figure on the dashboard is calculated from the tabs behind it, and nothing is typed into a summary, so the front page always agrees with the rows it came from.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eInvoices as well\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eAn Invoices tab holds 120 invoices with client, amount, status and due date. It totals what was invoiced, what was paid, what is outstanding and what is overdue, and counts the days late on anything unpaid, so it works as an invoice tracker too.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eThirteen connected tabs\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eEvery tab reads the same source list, so nothing is entered twice. Behind the contractor payments sits a full bookkeeping ledger:\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThe ledger:\u003c\/strong\u003e Income and Expenses, 500 rows each, with the tax split out per line, your own categories and account balances\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThe tax:\u003c\/strong\u003e sales tax by quarter and by rate, quarterly set-asides, and mileage valued at your rate\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThe reporting:\u003c\/strong\u003e profit and loss, monthly and quarterly views, any date range, this year against last, and a live dashboard\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eYou get real spreadsheet files, not a PDF with a link in it: Excel and Google Sheets, each filled in and each blank and ready for yours. The filled copy is the file in the photos, so you can see how it behaves before you type anything.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWorks with\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMicrosoft Excel 2016, 2019, 2021 and Microsoft 365, on Windows and Mac, and LibreOffice. No Microsoft 365 subscription required.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGoogle Sheets with a free Google account. No Google account is needed for the Excel files.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo add-ins, no macros and no subscription\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhat you download\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe Excel workbook filled with a worked example, and the same workbook blank and ready for yours\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe instruction guide, which has one-click links to the Google Sheets versions (filled and blank)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe terms of use as a PDF\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eYour files are ready to download as soon as payment clears. The Start Here tab walks you through setup in a few minutes. The files are for personal use on your own devices; please do not share or resell them. Questions before or after you buy? Use our contact page and we will help.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I use it in Excel and Google Sheets?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. You get Excel files for Excel 2016 or later on Windows and Mac, and the instruction guide has one-click links to make your own Google Sheets copies with a free Google account.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow does it total what each contractor was paid?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYou type the contractor name once, and paid to date, job count, average and last paid are calculated from the payments in the ledger.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it file 1099 forms?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. It records and totals payments so you can see who crossed the threshold. It is a tracker, not tax advice or a filing service.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow many contractors and invoices does it hold?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eUp to 60 contractors and 120 invoices, with 500 income rows and 500 expense rows in the ledger.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it show overdue invoices?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The Invoices tab totals outstanding and overdue amounts and counts the days late on each unpaid invoice.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OPXVIA","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":67597863649374,"sku":"OPX-059","price":22.0,"currency_code":"CAD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0769\/2094\/6782\/files\/contractor-payment-1099-tracker-01.jpg?v=1790832263"},{"product_id":"home-office-expense-tracker","title":"Home Office Expense Tracker Spreadsheet","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis home office expense tracker records every running cost as it happens, so nothing has to be reconstructed from statements in April. It is for people who work from home and want the year's costs ready as single figures.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlease read:\u003c\/strong\u003e This is a tracker tool only, not financial, tax, legal, medical or any other professional advice or advisory service. It records and calculates what you enter; you are solely responsible for checking all figures, rates, dates and results and for every decision you make. By purchasing, downloading or using it, you accept these terms (your statutory consumer rights are not affected).\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eRunning costs, category by category\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eRent, energy, internet and insurance each have their own category, so a year's worth is one figure at the end rather than a hunt through bank statements. The file adds up exactly what you enter. Every figure on the dashboard is calculated from the tabs behind it, and nothing is typed into a summary, so the front page always agrees with the rows it came from.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eTwelve connected tabs\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eEvery tab reads the same source list, so nothing is entered twice. There are 1,000 ledger rows and room for 200 trips:\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThe ledger:\u003c\/strong\u003e Income and Expenses, 500 rows each, with the tax split out per line, your own categories and account balances\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThe tax:\u003c\/strong\u003e sales tax by quarter and by rate, quarterly set-asides, and mileage valued at your rate\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThe reporting:\u003c\/strong\u003e profit and loss, monthly and quarterly views, any date range, this year against last, and a live dashboard\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eFor the self employed, that makes it a tax spreadsheet for all your business expenses, not just the home office. It includes a mileage tracker that values trips at your own rate, a profit and loss, quarterly set-asides and a comparison of this year against last.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eYou get real spreadsheet files, not a PDF with a link in it: Excel and Google Sheets, each filled in and each blank and ready for yours. The filled copy is the file in the photos, so you can see how it behaves before you type anything.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWorks with\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMicrosoft Excel 2016, 2019, 2021 and Microsoft 365, on Windows and Mac, and LibreOffice. No Microsoft 365 subscription required.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGoogle Sheets with a free Google account. No Google account is needed for the Excel files.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo add-ins, no macros and no subscription\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhat you download\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe Excel workbook filled with a worked example, and the same workbook blank and ready for yours\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe instruction guide, which has one-click links to the Google Sheets versions (filled and blank)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe terms of use as a PDF\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eYour files are ready to download as soon as payment clears. The Start Here tab walks you through setup in a few minutes. The files are for personal use on your own devices; please do not share or resell them. Questions before or after you buy? Use our contact page and we will help.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it work in Excel or Google Sheets?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eBoth. You download Excel files for Excel 2016 or later on Windows and Mac, and the instruction guide has one-click links to make Google Sheets copies with a free Google account.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it work out my home office deduction?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt records and totals your running costs by category. It does not decide what you can claim; that is for you or your accountant to check.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhich costs have their own categories?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eRent, energy, internet and insurance each have their own category, and you can edit the category list on Setup.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I log business mileage too?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. There is room for 200 trips, each valued at the rate you set.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I see a quarter or a custom period?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. There are monthly and quarterly views, and the custom range recalculates everything for any two dates.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OPXVIA","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":67597863682142,"sku":"OPX-060","price":20.0,"currency_code":"CAD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0769\/2094\/6782\/files\/home-office-expense-tracker-01.jpg?v=1790832269"},{"product_id":"wholesale-purchase-order-tracker","title":"Wholesale and Purchase Order Tracker Spreadsheet","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis wholesale order tracker shows what you buy, what it costs and what is left on the shelf, in one file. It is for small businesses that order stock in and want cost, margin and reorder levels in the same place.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlease read:\u003c\/strong\u003e This is a tracker tool only, not financial, tax, legal, medical or any other professional advice or advisory service. It records and calculates what you enter; you are solely responsible for checking all figures, rates, dates and results and for every decision you make. By purchasing, downloading or using it, you accept these terms (your statutory consumer rights are not affected).\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eOne material list feeds everything\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eEach material and its unit cost is entered once. That list feeds the product costs, the stock valuation and the reorder flag, so when a supplier changes a price you change it once and everything downstream re-prices. As a supplier tracker, the Materials tab also shows how many products use each item.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eEleven connected tabs\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eEvery tab reads the same source list, so nothing is entered twice:\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWhat you sell:\u003c\/strong\u003e Products, 120 rows, and Materials, 120 rows, with a recipe per product, cost built from the recipe, and one product list feeding everything\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWhat it is worth:\u003c\/strong\u003e suggested price, margin before the fee and after it, stock valued at cost and at retail, and a reorder flag\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWhat sold:\u003c\/strong\u003e Orders, 400 lines, with profit per line, sales by channel and by month, and a live dashboard\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt works as an inventory tracker and stock tracker for what is on the shelf, a purchase order record for what you bought, and a profit tracker for every order line. Every figure on the dashboard is calculated from the tabs behind it, and nothing is typed into a summary, so the front page always agrees with the rows it came from.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eYou get real spreadsheet files, not a PDF with a link in it: Excel and Google Sheets, each filled in and each blank and ready for yours. The filled copy is the file in the photos, so you can see how it behaves before you type anything.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWorks with\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMicrosoft Excel 2016, 2019, 2021 and Microsoft 365, on Windows and Mac, and LibreOffice. No Microsoft 365 subscription required.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGoogle Sheets with a free Google account. No Google account is needed for the Excel files.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo add-ins, no macros and no subscription\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhat you download\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe Excel workbook filled with a worked example, and the same workbook blank and ready for yours\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe instruction guide, which has one-click links to the Google Sheets versions (filled and blank)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe terms of use as a PDF\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eYour files are ready to download as soon as payment clears. The Start Here tab walks you through setup in a few minutes. The files are for personal use on your own devices; please do not share or resell them. Questions before or after you buy? Use our contact page and we will help.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I use it in Excel or Google Sheets?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eBoth. You get Excel files for Excel 2016 or later on Windows and Mac, and the instruction guide has one-click links to make Google Sheets copies with a free Google account.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat happens when a supplier raises a price?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eChange the unit cost once on Materials, and every product cost, stock value and margin that uses it updates.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it tell me when to reorder?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Stock has a reorder flag that shows when an item needs ordering again.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow many products and orders does it hold?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e120 products, 120 materials and 400 order lines.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I see sales by channel?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Order lines are totaled by channel and by month, with profit worked out on each line.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OPXVIA","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":67597863714910,"sku":"OPX-061","price":25.0,"currency_code":"CAD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0769\/2094\/6782\/files\/wholesale-purchase-order-tracker-01.jpg?v=1790832274"},{"product_id":"craft-material-cost-calculator","title":"Craft Material Cost Calculator Spreadsheet","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis craft cost calculator works out what a piece costs in materials before you decide its price. It is for makers running a handmade business who want product costing they can trust rather than a rough guess.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlease read:\u003c\/strong\u003e This is a tracker tool only, not financial, tax, legal, medical or any other professional advice or advisory service. It records and calculates what you enter; you are solely responsible for checking all figures, rates, dates and results and for every decision you make. By purchasing, downloading or using it, you accept these terms (your statutory consumer rights are not affected).\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eCost built from the recipe\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eEach product has a recipe: every material that goes into it, in the quantity used, at the unit price you set. The material cost adds itself up from those lines, and if one price changes, every piece that uses it re-costs itself. Every figure on the dashboard is calculated from the tabs behind it, and nothing is typed into a summary, so the front page always agrees with the rows it came from.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eTen connected tabs\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eEvery tab reads the same source list, so nothing is entered twice:\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWhat you sell:\u003c\/strong\u003e Products, 120 rows, and Materials, 120 rows, with a recipe per product, cost built from the recipe, and one product list feeding everything, plus 300 recipe lines\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWhat it is worth:\u003c\/strong\u003e suggested price, margin before the fee and after it, stock valued at cost and at retail, and a reorder flag\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWhat sold:\u003c\/strong\u003e Orders, 400 lines, with profit per line, sales by channel and by month, and a live dashboard\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe suggested price and the margin before and after the selling fee make it a pricing calculator as well, so you can see the profit margin on each piece before it goes on sale.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eYou get real spreadsheet files, not a PDF with a link in it: Excel and Google Sheets, each filled in and each blank and ready for yours. The filled copy is the file in the photos, so you can see how it behaves before you type anything.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWorks with\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMicrosoft Excel 2016, 2019, 2021 and Microsoft 365, on Windows and Mac, and LibreOffice. No Microsoft 365 subscription required.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGoogle Sheets with a free Google account. No Google account is needed for the Excel files.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo add-ins, no macros and no subscription\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhat you download\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe Excel workbook filled with a worked example, and the same workbook blank and ready for yours\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe instruction guide, which has one-click links to the Google Sheets versions (filled and blank)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe terms of use as a PDF\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eYour files are ready to download as soon as payment clears. The Start Here tab walks you through setup in a few minutes. The files are for personal use on your own devices; please do not share or resell them. Questions before or after you buy? Use our contact page and we will help.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it work in Excel and Google Sheets?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. You get Excel files for Excel 2016 or later on Windows and Mac, and the instruction guide has one-click links to make your own Google Sheets copies with a free Google account.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow is the material cost of a piece worked out?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eFrom its recipe: each material, the quantity used and the unit cost you set. The line costs add up to the product cost.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat if a material price changes?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eChange it once on the Materials tab and every product that uses it re-costs itself.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it suggest a selling price?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. It shows a suggested price and your margin before and after the selling fee.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow much does it hold?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e120 products, 120 materials, 300 recipe lines and 400 order lines.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OPXVIA","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":67597863747678,"sku":"OPX-062","price":20.0,"currency_code":"CAD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0769\/2094\/6782\/files\/craft-material-cost-calculator-01.jpg?v=1790832280"},{"product_id":"real-estate-agent-crm-tracker","title":"Real Estate Agent CRM and Client Tracker","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis real estate CRM weights every live deal by its price, your commission rate and the odds you give it, so your pipeline is a figure you can plan around. A 512,000 listing at 35% odds is not 512,000 of pipeline; at the demo's commission rate it is 4,032 of commission.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlease read:\u003c\/strong\u003e This is a tracker tool only, not financial, tax, legal, medical or any other professional advice or advisory service. It records and calculates what you enter; you are solely responsible for checking all figures, rates, dates and results and for every decision you make. By purchasing, downloading or using it, you accept these terms (your statutory consumer rights are not affected).\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eThe pipeline\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eEach deal carries its price, commission rate and odds, and the three are multiplied. That last step is the reason to keep a sales pipeline at all.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePipeline: 40 deals, weighted by the odds you set\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWhat closes inside 30 days, totaled\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eValue and weighted value by stage, with each stage's share\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eWith a stage and a next step on each row, it doubles as a lead tracker.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eThe books underneath\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eBelow the pipeline sits a full bookkeeping engine: income, expenses, invoices, mileage, sales tax, quarterly and annual views, and a year-on-year comparison. Commission banked reads the same ledger the profit and loss reads, so the pipeline and the books are one file. It is a commission tracker and realtor bookkeeping in the same realtor spreadsheet.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e1,000 ledger rows, with two years of demo data in the filled copy\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eProfit and loss by category, with monthly and quarterly views\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eA custom date range, and a year-on-year comparison\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eEvery figure calculated: totals, margins and percentages\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCharts that redraw from your own numbers, not pictures\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eSeventeen connected tabs\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eEverything recalculates from two registers, money in and money out. Nothing is typed twice, and there are no pivot tables to refresh.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eYou get a filled-in copy with two full years already entered, so you can click through it working, and a blank ready for your own numbers, in Excel and Google Sheets. There are no dynamic arrays, no macros and no add-ins, and the Google Sheets version is a real workbook, not a PDF with a link in it.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWorks with\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMicrosoft Excel 2016, 2019, 2021 and Microsoft 365, on Windows and Mac, and LibreOffice. No Microsoft 365 subscription required.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGoogle Sheets with a free Google account. No Google account is needed for the Excel files.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo add-ins, no macros, no subscription and no bank connection\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhat you download\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe Excel workbook filled with a worked example, and the same workbook blank and ready for yours\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe instruction guide, which has one-click links to the Google Sheets versions (filled and blank)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe terms of use as a PDF\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eYour files are ready to download as soon as payment clears. The Start Here tab walks you through setup in a few minutes. The files are for use in your own business; please do not share or resell them. Questions before or after you buy? Use our contact page and we will help.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it work in Excel or Google Sheets?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eBoth. You get Excel files for Excel 2016 or later on Windows and Mac, and the instruction guide has one-click links to make Google Sheets copies with a free Google account.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow is weighted pipeline worked out?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eFor every deal: price times your commission rate times the odds you set. The totals are shown overall and by stage.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow many deals can it hold?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe pipeline holds 40 deals, and the ledger holds 1,000 rows.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it handle my expenses and taxes too?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Income, expenses, invoices, mileage and sales tax are all in the same file, with profit and loss and quarterly views.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it connect to my MLS or bank?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. There is no bank connection, no add-ins and no macros. You enter your deals and transactions yourself.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OPXVIA","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":67597864173662,"sku":"OPX-072","price":29.0,"currency_code":"CAD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0769\/2094\/6782\/files\/real-estate-agent-crm-tracker-01.jpg?v=1790832339"},{"product_id":"client-crm-sales-pipeline-tracker","title":"Client CRM Tracker Spreadsheet","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis client CRM tracker keeps every live opportunity, its odds and the next thing to do in one sheet, with your books underneath. It suits consultants, service businesses and anyone who wants a freelance CRM without a monthly subscription.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlease read:\u003c\/strong\u003e This is a tracker tool only, not financial, tax, legal, medical or any other professional advice or advisory service. It records and calculates what you enter; you are solely responsible for checking all figures, rates, dates and results and for every decision you make. By purchasing, downloading or using it, you accept these terms (your statutory consumer rights are not affected).\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eA pipeline you can plan against\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eEach opportunity has a value and the odds you give it, and the two are multiplied. A 118,000 project at 30% shows as 35,400 of pipeline, which is the number you can actually plan against. Every row also carries the one thing to do next.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePipeline: 40 live deals, weighted by the odds you set\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eA next step on every row, and what closes inside 30 days\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eValue and weighted value by stage\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eThe books underneath\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe whole bookkeeping engine sits below: clients, income, expenses, invoices, monthly and quarterly views, profit and loss and a year-on-year comparison, all reading two registers. So client management and the money side live in the same file, and the invoice tracker reads the same ledger as the reports.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e1,000 ledger rows, with two years of demo data in the filled copy\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eProfit and loss by category, with monthly and quarterly views\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eA custom date range, and a year-on-year comparison\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eEvery figure calculated: totals, margins and percentages\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCharts that redraw from your own numbers, not pictures\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFifteen connected tabs\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eEverything recalculates from two registers, money in and money out. Nothing is typed twice, and there are no pivot tables to refresh. The sales pipeline and the bookkeeping never disagree because they read the same rows.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eYou get a filled-in copy with two full years already entered, so you can click through it working, and a blank ready for your own numbers, in Excel and Google Sheets. There are no dynamic arrays, no macros and no add-ins, and the Google Sheets version is a real workbook, not a PDF with a link in it.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWorks with\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMicrosoft Excel 2016, 2019, 2021 and Microsoft 365, on Windows and Mac, and LibreOffice. No Microsoft 365 subscription required.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGoogle Sheets with a free Google account. No Google account is needed for the Excel files.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo add-ins, no macros, no subscription and no bank connection\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhat you download\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe Excel workbook filled with a worked example, and the same workbook blank and ready for yours\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe instruction guide, which has one-click links to the Google Sheets versions (filled and blank)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe terms of use as a PDF\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eYour files are ready to download as soon as payment clears. The Start Here tab walks you through setup in a few minutes. The files are for use in your own business; please do not share or resell them. Questions before or after you buy? Use our contact page and we will help.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it work in Excel or Google Sheets?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eBoth. You get Excel files for Excel 2016 or later on Windows and Mac, and the instruction guide has one-click links to make Google Sheets copies with a free Google account.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow is the weighted pipeline calculated?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eEach opportunity's value is multiplied by the odds you give it, and the totals are shown by stage and for deals closing inside 30 days.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I note the next step for each client?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Every row in the pipeline has a next-step column.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it include invoices and bookkeeping?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Clients, income, expenses, invoices, monthly and quarterly views, profit and loss and a year-on-year comparison are all included.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow much can it hold?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e40 live deals in the pipeline and 1,000 ledger rows.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OPXVIA","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":67597864206430,"sku":"OPX-073","price":25.0,"currency_code":"CAD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0769\/2094\/6782\/files\/client-crm-sales-pipeline-tracker-01.jpg?v=1790832344"},{"product_id":"construction-job-cost-tracker","title":"Construction Job Cost Tracker Spreadsheet","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis job costing spreadsheet shows which jobs made money and which did not, at any point in the year. In the demo, eight jobs ran and seven made money; the tracker tells you which one did not. It is built for builders, trades and any contractor who prices and runs jobs.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlease read:\u003c\/strong\u003e This is a tracker tool only, not financial, tax, legal, medical or any other professional advice or advisory service. It records and calculates what you enter; you are solely responsible for checking all figures, rates, dates and results and for every decision you make. By purchasing, downloading or using it, you accept these terms (your statutory consumer rights are not affected).\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFive cost heads on every job\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eLabor, materials, subcontractor, plant and other are tracked on each job against the contract value and against what you have actually invoiced. Gross profit, margin and a status appear on each row, and the strip at the top counts how many jobs are losing money. That job profit view is the core of the file.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eStill to invoice\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eStill to invoice is the figure that catches contractors out, and it is here for each job and in total: 424,130 across the demo's eight jobs. Invoiced reads the income register, so a progress claim entered once against the job name shows up without being typed twice.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eJob Costing: 30 jobs, five cost heads each\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGross profit, margin and a status per job, with losses flagged\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eStill to invoice, per job and in total\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eThe books behind the jobs\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e1,000 ledger rows, with two years of demo data in the filled copy\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eProfit and loss by category, with monthly and quarterly views\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eA custom date range, and a year-on-year comparison\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eEvery figure calculated: totals, margins and percentages\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCharts that redraw from your own numbers, not pictures\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eThere are seventeen connected tabs, and everything recalculates from two registers, money in and money out. Nothing is typed twice and there are no pivot tables to refresh. It works as a contractor tracker and a construction budget record for each project cost.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eYou get a filled-in copy with two full years already entered, so you can click through it working, and a blank ready for your own numbers, in Excel and Google Sheets. There are no dynamic arrays, no macros and no add-ins, and the Google Sheets version is a real workbook, not a PDF with a link in it.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWorks with\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMicrosoft Excel 2016, 2019, 2021 and Microsoft 365, on Windows and Mac, and LibreOffice. No Microsoft 365 subscription required.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGoogle Sheets with a free Google account. No Google account is needed for the Excel files.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo add-ins, no macros, no subscription and no bank connection\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhat you download\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe Excel workbook filled with a worked example, and the same workbook blank and ready for yours\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe instruction guide, which has one-click links to the Google Sheets versions (filled and blank)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe terms of use as a PDF\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eYour files are ready to download as soon as payment clears. The Start Here tab walks you through setup in a few minutes. The files are for use in your own business; please do not share or resell them. Questions before or after you buy? Use our contact page and we will help.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it work in Excel or Google Sheets?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eBoth. You get Excel files for Excel 2016 or later on Windows and Mac, and the instruction guide has one-click links to make Google Sheets copies with a free Google account.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat costs are tracked on each job?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eFive cost heads: labor, materials, subcontractors, plant and other, against the contract value and what has been invoiced.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow many jobs can I track?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Job Costing tab holds 30 jobs, and the ledger holds 1,000 rows.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow does it know what I have invoiced?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eInvoiced reads the income register. Enter a progress claim once against the job name and it shows on the job.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it flag jobs that lose money?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Each job has gross profit, margin and a status, and the top strip counts the jobs losing money.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OPXVIA","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":67597864239198,"sku":"OPX-074","price":35.0,"currency_code":"CAD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0769\/2094\/6782\/files\/construction-job-cost-tracker-01.jpg?v=1790832350"},{"product_id":"nonprofit-bookkeeping-donation-tracker","title":"Nonprofit Bookkeeping and Donation Tracker","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis nonprofit bookkeeping spreadsheet keeps money given for one purpose apart from money for everything else. Money raised for the roof cannot pay the electricity bill, and here each fund shows what came in, what went out and what is left. It is for a treasurer or volunteer who keeps the books for a small charity or nonprofit.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlease read:\u003c\/strong\u003e This is a tracker tool only, not financial, tax, legal, medical or any other professional advice or advisory service. It records and calculates what you enter; you are solely responsible for checking all figures, rates, dates and results and for every decision you make. By purchasing, downloading or using it, you accept these terms (your statutory consumer rights are not affected).\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFund accounting\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThree funds, restricted, grant-funded and general, each show what came in, what went out of it and what remains. Spend past what was given and the balance turns red. The rows add up exactly once: the general fund carries every expense category no restricted fund claims, so nothing is double-counted and nothing is missed.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eDonors and pledges\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eEach donor gets a statement with their gifts, total given, amount pledged, what is still to come and a receipt number, so year-end letters are quick to prepare. It works as a donation tracker and a pledge tracker in one.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDonations: restricted funds and the general fund, kept apart\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eA statement per donor with a receipt number, for donor statements at year end\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePledges against what has actually arrived\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eThe books underneath\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e1,000 ledger rows, with two years of demo data in the filled copy\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eProfit and loss by category, with monthly and quarterly views\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eA custom date range, and a year-on-year comparison\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eEvery figure calculated: totals, margins and percentages\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCharts that redraw from your own numbers, not pictures\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eThere are thirteen connected tabs, and everything recalculates from two registers, money in and money out. Nothing is typed twice and there are no pivot tables to refresh.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eYou get a filled-in copy with two full years already entered, so you can click through it working, and a blank ready for your own numbers, in Excel and Google Sheets. There are no dynamic arrays, no macros and no add-ins, and the Google Sheets version is a real workbook, not a PDF with a link in it.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWorks with\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMicrosoft Excel 2016, 2019, 2021 and Microsoft 365, on Windows and Mac, and LibreOffice. No Microsoft 365 subscription required.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGoogle Sheets with a free Google account. No Google account is needed for the Excel files.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo add-ins, no macros, no subscription and no bank connection\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhat you download\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe Excel workbook filled with a worked example, and the same workbook blank and ready for yours\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe instruction guide, which has one-click links to the Google Sheets versions (filled and blank)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe terms of use as a PDF\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eYour files are ready to download as soon as payment clears. The Start Here tab walks you through setup in a few minutes. The files are for use in your own organization; please do not share or resell them. Questions before or after you buy? Use our contact page and we will help.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it work in Excel or Google Sheets?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eBoth. You get Excel files for Excel 2016 or later on Windows and Mac, and the instruction guide has one-click links to make Google Sheets copies with a free Google account.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I keep restricted donations separate?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Restricted, grant-funded and general funds are kept apart, each with what came in, what went out and what is left. Overspending a fund turns its balance red.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it produce donor statements?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Each donor has a statement with gifts, total given, pledged, still to come and a receipt number.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it track pledges?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Pledges are compared with what has actually arrived, per donor.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs it accounting or legal advice?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. It records and calculates what you enter. Check the figures and any reporting rules that apply to your organization.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OPXVIA","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":67597864271966,"sku":"OPX-075","price":29.0,"currency_code":"CAD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0769\/2094\/6782\/files\/nonprofit-bookkeeping-donation-tracker-01.jpg?v=1790832356"},{"product_id":"church-budget-tithe-tracker","title":"Church Budget and Tithe Tracker Spreadsheet","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis church budget spreadsheet is built for the treasurer who has to keep designated money where the giver meant it to go. It tracks tithes and offerings across five funds, keeps the restricted ones separate, and gives you the full church budget underneath.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlease read:\u003c\/strong\u003e This is a tracker tool only, not financial, tax, legal, medical or any other professional advice or advisory service. It records and calculates what you enter; you are solely responsible for checking all figures, rates, dates and results and for every decision you make. By purchasing, downloading or using it, you accept these terms (your statutory consumer rights are not affected).\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFive funds, kept apart\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eMost giving logs only record what came in. A church treasurer also has to know how much of it is already promised. Here the building fund, missions, benevolence and designated giving each carry their own income and pay only for their own costs. A gift to the roof stays with the roof.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFive funds, four of them restricted\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpend more from a restricted fund than was given to it and the balance turns red\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eEach fund shows its own money in and money out\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eGiving statements and pledges\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe tithe tracker side of the workbook works by envelope number, so you can answer a member's question or prepare the year-end letter without searching through the ledger.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eA statement for every envelope number: each gift, the total given, the amount pledged and what is still to come\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eA receipt number on each statement for the year-end letter\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eA pledge tracker comparing what each giver promised with what has actually arrived\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eThe budget and the books\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eEverything recalculates from two registers, money in and money out. Nothing is entered twice and there are no pivot tables to refresh.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e1,000 ledger rows, with two years of demo data already entered in the filled copy\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eProfit and loss by category, with monthly and quarterly views\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eA custom date range and a year-on-year comparison\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eEvery total, margin and percentage calculated for you\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCharts that redraw from your own numbers, not static pictures\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eThirteen connected tabs\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eA Start Here tab walks you through setup in a few minutes. From there the workbook covers setup, the giving tracker, income, expenses, monthly and quarterly views, profit and loss, a custom range, the year-on-year comparison, fund balances and a dashboard.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWorks with\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMicrosoft Excel 2016 or later, on Windows or Mac\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGoogle Sheets with a free Google account. The Google Sheets version is a real workbook, not a PDF with a link in it.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBuilt with no dynamic arrays, no macros and no add-ins, so it behaves the same on Excel 2016, 2019, 2021 and Microsoft 365 and in LibreOffice. No Microsoft 365 subscription is required.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo subscription and no bank connection\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhat you download\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTwo Excel files: one filled with two full years of example data so you can click through it working, and a blank one ready for your own numbers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe instruction guide, which has one-click links to the Google Sheets versions (filled and blank)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe terms of use as a PDF\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eYour files are ready to download as soon as payment clears. Questions before or after you buy? Use our contact page and we will help.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it work in Excel or Google Sheets?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eBoth. You get two Excel files for Excel 2016 or later on Windows or Mac, and the instruction guide has one-click links to copy the Google Sheets versions with a free Google account.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I keep building fund and missions money separate from general giving?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. There are five funds, four of them restricted, and each one has its own income and its own spending. If a restricted fund is overspent, its balance turns red.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I give members a statement of their giving?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Each envelope number gets a statement with its gifts, total given, amount pledged, what is still to come and a receipt number for the year-end letter.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I track pledges?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Pledges are compared with what has actually arrived, giver by giver.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs there an example to learn from?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. One copy comes filled with two years of demo data across 1,000 ledger rows, and a blank copy is ready for your own records.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OPXVIA","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":67597864304734,"sku":"OPX-076","price":27.0,"currency_code":"CAD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0769\/2094\/6782\/files\/church-budget-tithe-tracker-01.jpg?v=1790832362"},{"product_id":"farm-bookkeeping-spreadsheet","title":"Farm and Homestead Bookkeeping Spreadsheet","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis farm bookkeeping spreadsheet shows which parts of your farm or homestead actually make money. Instead of one whole-farm profit figure, it works out a gross margin for each enterprise, so a losing flock cannot hide behind a good harvest.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlease read:\u003c\/strong\u003e This is a tracker tool only, not financial, tax, legal, medical or any other professional advice or advisory service. It records and calculates what you enter; you are solely responsible for checking all figures, rates, dates and results and for every decision you make. By purchasing, downloading or using it, you accept these terms (your statutory consumer rights are not affected).\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eGross margin for every enterprise\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eA farm with a dairy herd, a couple of crops and a flock is several businesses sharing one bank account. The Enterprises tab separates them.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eEight enterprises in the example, with room for 20 rows, each with its own revenue, direct costs and gross margin\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMargin per acre and per head, the figure that lets you compare a wheat field with a dairy herd\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAnything under 15% is flagged, and anything losing money is named\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eRevenue that sorts itself\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eYou never type an enterprise's revenue. Each enterprise has its own income code, so a sale entered once in the ledger lands against the right one. Direct costs are what you spent on that enterprise alone, such as seed, feed and vet bills, which is why the result is a gross margin rather than a profit. Whole-farm overheads stay in the profit and loss, where they belong.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eThe full farm books underneath\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eEverything recalculates from two registers, money in and money out. Nothing is entered twice and there are no pivot tables to refresh.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e1,000 ledger rows, with two years of demo data in the filled copy\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eProfit and loss by category, with monthly and quarterly views\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eA custom date range and a year-on-year comparison\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eEvery total, margin and percentage calculated for you\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCharts that redraw from your own numbers, not static pictures\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFifteen connected tabs\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eA Start Here tab walks you through setup in a few minutes. The workbook covers setup, income, farm expenses, enterprises, monthly and quarterly views, profit and loss, sales tax, estimated tax, a custom range, the year-on-year comparison, mileage, balances and a dashboard. It is farm record keeping and homestead finance in one file, from the first load sold to the year-end figures.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWorks with\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMicrosoft Excel 2016 or later, on Windows or Mac\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGoogle Sheets with a free Google account. The Google Sheets version is a real workbook, not a PDF with a link in it.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBuilt with no dynamic arrays, no macros and no add-ins, so it behaves the same on Excel 2016, 2019, 2021 and Microsoft 365 and in LibreOffice. No Microsoft 365 subscription is required.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo subscription and no bank connection\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhat you download\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTwo Excel files: one filled with two full years of example data so you can see it working, and a blank one for your own farm spreadsheet\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe instruction guide, which has one-click links to the Google Sheets versions (filled and blank)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe terms of use as a PDF\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eYour files are ready to download as soon as payment clears. Questions before or after you buy? Use our contact page and we will help.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I use it in Excel or Google Sheets?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eEither. The download has Excel files for Excel 2016 or later on Windows or Mac, and the instruction guide has one-click links to the Google Sheets versions, which need only a free Google account.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow does it work out the margin for each enterprise?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eEach enterprise has its own income code, so sales attribute themselves from the ledger. Direct costs for that enterprise are subtracted to give a gross margin, shown per acre and per head as well.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs gross margin the same as profit?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. Gross margin counts only the direct costs of each enterprise. Whole-farm overheads are kept in the profit and loss tab.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow many enterprises can I track?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Enterprises tab has 20 rows. The example uses eight.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it cover tax and mileage?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe workbook includes Sales Tax, Estimated Tax and Mileage tabs alongside the profit and loss. It records and calculates what you enter and is not tax advice.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OPXVIA","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":67597864337502,"sku":"OPX-077","price":27.0,"currency_code":"CAD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0769\/2094\/6782\/files\/farm-bookkeeping-spreadsheet-01.jpg?v=1790832368"},{"product_id":"team-task-tracker-spreadsheet","title":"Team Task Tracker Spreadsheet","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis team task tracker answers the question managers actually ask: who has too much, who has room, and who is sitting on something overdue. Most task lists are sorted by project. This one adds a row for every person.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlease read:\u003c\/strong\u003e This is a tracker tool only, not financial, tax, legal, medical or any other professional advice or advisory service. It records and calculates what you enter; you are solely responsible for checking all figures, rates, dates and results and for every decision you make. By purchasing, downloading or using it, you accept these terms (your statutory consumer rights are not affected).\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eA row for every person\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe By Person tab works as a workload tracker for the whole team.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOpen, done, overdue and due this week for each person\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHow many different projects each person is being pulled across\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLoad measured against a capacity you set in one cell, with anyone at or over it flagged\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eA recommendation for each person: give two away, overdue work first, at capacity, or room for one more\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eIn the demo there are eight people, and seven of them have overdue work, so you can see straight away how the flags and recommendations behave.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eOne task list, several views\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe same task list drives every view, so nothing is moved between them and nothing is stored twice.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eA Kanban board for the status of each task\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAn Eisenhower priority matrix for what is urgent and what is important\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eA real Gantt drawn from your own start and end dates\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRoom for 1,000 tasks and 100 projects\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eThe rest of the project engine\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eEverything reads one task list and one charter. The fourteen connected tabs also cover deliverables, risks and issues, resources, stakeholders, costs and a dashboard, with a Start Here tab that walks you through setup in a few minutes.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eEvery percentage, count, day and total calculated for you\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCharts that redraw from your own numbers, not static pictures\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eA filled copy with eight projects and 72 tasks already running, so the task management views are populated from the start\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWorks with\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMicrosoft Excel 2016 or later, on Windows or Mac\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGoogle Sheets with a free Google account. The Google Sheets version is a real workbook, not a PDF with a link in it.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo dynamic arrays, no macros and no add-ins, so this team planner behaves the same on Excel 2016, 2019, 2021 and Microsoft 365 and in LibreOffice. No Microsoft 365 subscription is required.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo subscription\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhat you download\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTwo Excel files: one with eight projects and 72 tasks already running, and a blank one\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe instruction guide, which has one-click links to the Google Sheets versions (filled and blank)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe terms of use as a PDF\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eYour files are ready to download as soon as payment clears. Questions before or after you buy? Use our contact page and we will help.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I use it in Excel or Google Sheets?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eEither. The Excel files work in Excel 2016 or later on Windows or Mac, and the instruction guide has one-click links to the Google Sheets versions for a free Google account.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow does it measure each person's workload?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt counts each person's open tasks against a capacity you set in one cell and flags anyone at or over it, with a recommendation for what to do.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDo I have to update the Kanban board separately?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. The Kanban board, the Eisenhower matrix and the Gantt all read the same task list, so a change in one place shows everywhere.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow many tasks and projects can it hold?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eUp to 1,000 tasks and 100 projects.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs there an example to learn from?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The filled copy has eight projects and 72 tasks already running, and a blank copy is ready for your team.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OPXVIA","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":67597864566878,"sku":"OPX-084","price":24.0,"currency_code":"CAD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0769\/2094\/6782\/files\/team-task-tracker-spreadsheet-01.jpg?v=1790832408"},{"product_id":"contractor-bid-estimate-calculator","title":"Contractor Bid and Estimate Calculator Spreadsheet","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis contractor bid workbook prices a job from one rate card, so when a carpenter's day rate goes from 285 to 300 you change one cell and every bid line that uses him moves. It is for builders and trades who want an estimating tool that remembers their rates and their results, not just a blank quote form.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlease read:\u003c\/strong\u003e This is a tracker tool only, not financial, tax, legal, medical or any other professional advice or advisory service. It records and calculates what you enter; you are solely responsible for checking all figures, rates, dates and results and for every decision you make. By purchasing, downloading or using it, you accept these terms (your statutory consumer rights are not affected).\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eA rate card the bid reads\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe rate card holds twenty-five lines covering labor, subcontract, materials and plant. The take-off prices itself from it: you enter the quantities and the rates are looked up. When a supplier puts his prices up, repricing a job takes one cell, not an afternoon.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eA bid with room for 48 lines across nine sections, with rates looked up\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eA line whose rate comes back as zero turns red and is counted on the summary strip, because a missing rate is how a bid goes out too low\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCost and price by section, with each section's share of the bid\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eMarkup you can see on every line\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eOverhead, markup and contingency are applied to each line and shown on each line, rather than added as a hidden percentage at the bottom. Each line's share of the construction bid is visible too: in the demo job, site management is 6% of the total, and you see that before the client does. It works as a markup calculator and an estimate template in one.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eThe Bids Log\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Bids Log works as a bid tracker for every quote you send: sent, won, lost or pending, with a win rate and the value still out. A win rate that is too high usually means the markup is too low. One that is too low suggests you are pricing work you should not be bidding for. Neither shows up anywhere else.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eThirteen connected tabs\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eEverything prices off one rate card, so nothing is typed twice. Alongside the materials, bid and bids log tabs, the workbook carries a shop engine underneath with products, pricing, inventory, orders, customers, sales and a dashboard. A Start Here tab walks you through setup in a few minutes, and charts redraw from your own numbers, not static pictures.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWorks with\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMicrosoft Excel 2016 or later, on Windows or Mac\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGoogle Sheets with a free Google account. The Google Sheets version is a real workbook, not a PDF with a link in it.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo dynamic arrays, no macros and no add-ins, so it behaves the same on Excel 2016, 2019, 2021 and Microsoft 365 and in LibreOffice. No Microsoft 365 subscription is required.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo subscription and no bank connection\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhat you download\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTwo Excel files: one with a worked 190,000 bid and fifteen logged quotes, and a blank one for your own jobs\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe instruction guide, which has one-click links to the Google Sheets versions (filled and blank)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe terms of use as a PDF\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eYour files are ready to download as soon as payment clears. Questions before or after you buy? Use our contact page and we will help.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it work in Excel or Google Sheets?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eBoth. The Excel files run on Excel 2016 or later on Windows or Mac, and the instruction guide has one-click links to the Google Sheets versions for a free Google account.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow do I update my prices?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eChange the rate once on the rate card. Every bid line that uses that rate is repriced automatically.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhere does the markup go?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eOverhead, markup and contingency are applied to each line and shown on each line, so you can see exactly how the price is built.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I track which bids I win?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The Bids Log records each quote as sent, won, lost or pending and calculates your win rate and the value still out.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow big a bid can it handle?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe bid has room for 48 lines across nine sections, priced from a rate card of twenty-five lines.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OPXVIA","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":67597864665182,"sku":"OPX-087","price":35.0,"currency_code":"CAD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0769\/2094\/6782\/files\/contractor-bid-estimate-calculator-01.jpg?v=1790832426"},{"product_id":"content-calendar-planner-spreadsheet","title":"Content Planner Dashboard Spreadsheet","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis content calendar tracks where every post came from, not only when it goes out. It is for creators and small brands who turn one idea into a Reel, a carousel, a Short and a newsletter, and want to know which ideas, formats and platforms actually work.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlease read:\u003c\/strong\u003e This is a tracker tool only, not financial, tax, legal, medical or any other professional advice or advisory service. It records and calculates what you enter; you are solely responsible for checking all figures, rates, dates and results and for every decision you make. By purchasing, downloading or using it, you accept these terms (your statutory consumer rights are not affected).\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eThe dashboard\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eNothing on the dashboard is typed. Pick any month or the full year and the page follows.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReach from your published posts, month by month, and posts published with the change on the month before\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePosts by month: published, still in the works and missed, with reach over it\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePillar mix: the share each content pillar got, next to the share you wanted\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePosting consistency: every day of the year, shaded by how many posts went out\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePosted as planned, and a pipeline showing where every post stands from idea to published\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eEngagement rate by platform, and the next ten posts not out yet\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eContent repurposing, tracked\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eEvery post on the Content Plan carries the idea it came from. You can see which ideas you have used fully, which became one post and stopped, and the reach and engagement rate for each idea rather than each post. Ideas used only once are flagged, so a good idea does not get retyped four times or forgotten.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eCadence and engagement\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCadence: what you actually published each week across eight platforms, against the number you set, marked hit, close or short, with weeks where something was planned and nothing went out flagged\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAn engagement tracker that calculates the rate on every post, then ranked by format, platform, content pillar and funnel stage: reach, nurture and convert\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePillars: the share you wanted against the share you got, with drift flagged\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePlatform followers gained and lost, against how much you posted that month\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eSixteen connected tabs\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eStart Here, Setup, Brand, Pillars, Goals, Ideas, Content Plan, Repurposing, Cadence, Calendar, Hashtags, Collaborations, Content Analytics, Platform Analytics, Finance and Dashboard.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eA Content Plan with room for 400 posts\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eA six-week calendar that reads the plan instead of being retyped\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHashtags grouped by size, and collaborations with a cost per thousand reached\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCharts and figures that redraw from your own numbers, not static pictures\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eLight and dark editions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eEvery download includes a light edition and a dark mode template edition, with every tab restyled and the same formulas in both. Each comes as a blank copy and filled with half a year already planned and published: 62 posts, 54 of them live and 245,000 reach. It works as an Instagram planner, a TikTok planner or a social media planner across all eight platforms, and is built without TEXTJOIN so older Excel versions open it cleanly.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWorks with\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMicrosoft Excel 2016 or later, on Windows or Mac\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGoogle Sheets with a free Google account. The Google Sheets version is a real workbook, not a PDF with a link in it.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo dynamic arrays, no macros and no add-ins, so it behaves the same on Excel 2016, 2019, 2021 and Microsoft 365 and in LibreOffice\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo subscription\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhat you download\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLight edition: the Excel workbook filled with a worked example, and a blank one\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDark edition: the same two files in the dark design\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe instruction guide, with one-click links to the Google Sheets versions (light and dark, filled and blank)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe terms of use as a PDF\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eYour files are ready to download as soon as payment clears. Questions before or after you buy? Use our contact page and we will help.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it work in Excel or Google Sheets?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eBoth. The Excel workbooks run on Excel 2016 or later on Windows or Mac, and the instruction guide has one-click links to the Google Sheets versions for a free Google account.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow does the repurposing tracking work?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eEvery post on the Content Plan is linked to the idea it came from, so the Repurposing tab shows how many formats each idea became and flags ideas used only once.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it calculate engagement rate for me?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Engagement rate is calculated on every post and ranked by format, platform, pillar and funnel stage.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow many posts and platforms can it handle?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Content Plan holds 400 posts, and cadence is measured across eight platforms.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs it filled in or blank?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eBoth are included. One copy has half a year of example posts already planned and published, and the other is blank for your own content.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OPXVIA","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":67597865156702,"sku":"OPX-092","price":25.0,"currency_code":"CAD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0769\/2094\/6782\/files\/content-calendar-planner-spreadsheet-01.jpg?v=1790832456"},{"product_id":"wedding-vendor-payment-tracker","title":"Wedding Vendor Payment Tracker Spreadsheet","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis vendor payment tracker shows which wedding payment lands next, how much it is and whether anything is already late. It is for couples and planners paying several suppliers in deposits, stage payments and balances, who need more than a single paid column.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlease read:\u003c\/strong\u003e This is a tracker tool only, not financial, tax, legal, medical or any other professional advice or advisory service. It records and calculates what you enter; you are solely responsible for checking all figures, rates, dates and results and for every decision you make. By purchasing, downloading or using it, you accept these terms (your statutory consumer rights are not affected).\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eEvery installment, dated\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eA wedding is not bought once. It is a deposit to hold the date, a stage payment in spring and a balance four weeks out, for each supplier. The Payments tab works as a deposit tracker and payment due tracker for all of them.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRoom for 60 installments, each with vendor, what the payment is for, amount and due date\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDays away, due soon and already late, all worked out for you\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOverdue payments turn red and are totaled at the top, along with what is due in the next thirty days\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eTotals per vendor\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eFor every supplier on the list, the file adds up what was agreed, what is paid, what is still to pay and the next date due. Nothing is retyped: it reads the payment schedule above it, so vendor management takes no extra work.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eThree quotes for the same job\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Quotes tab puts three quotes side by side for each category, works out the cheapest and shows what you actually chose beside it, with the difference. In the demo that difference comes to 3,180. Choosing the cheapest every time would be a different wedding, so this is not a telling-off. It is the figure you want in front of you while there is still time to change something.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eThe rest of the wedding planner\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eA wedding budget planner with estimated against actual across seventeen categories, and a share column\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eA guest list with RSVPs and meal choices\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eA wedding checklist grouped by how far out each job is: twelve months, nine, six, three, one, a week and on the day\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOne dashboard reading all of it, with nothing typed on it\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe nine connected tabs are Start Here, Setup, Budget, Guests, Checklist, Vendors, Payments, Quotes and Dashboard.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWorks with\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMicrosoft Excel 2016 or later, on Windows or Mac\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGoogle Sheets with a free Google account. The Google Sheets version is a real workbook, not a PDF with a link in it.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo dynamic arrays, no macros and no add-ins, so it behaves the same on Excel 2016, 2019, 2021 and Microsoft 365 and in LibreOffice. No Microsoft 365 subscription is required.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo subscription\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhat you download\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTwo Excel files: a demo wedding next May with fifteen installments, 7,160 paid, 15,530 still to come and one payment already late, and a blank one for your own\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe instruction guide, which has one-click links to the Google Sheets versions (filled and blank)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe terms of use as a PDF\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eYour files are ready to download as soon as payment clears. The template is for your own personal use, so please do not share or resell the files. Questions before or after you buy? Use our contact page and we will help.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it work in Excel or Google Sheets?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eBoth. The Excel files run on Excel 2016 or later on Windows or Mac, and the instruction guide has one-click links to the Google Sheets versions for a free Google account.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I track deposits and balances separately?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Each installment is its own row with its own amount and due date, so a deposit, a stage payment and a final balance for one supplier are tracked separately.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow do I know which payment is next?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eEvery installment shows how many days away it is, payments due soon are counted, and late ones turn red and are totaled at the top.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I compare vendor quotes?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The Quotes tab holds three quotes per category, works out the cheapest and shows the difference against the one you chose.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it include a budget and guest list?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. It has a budget across seventeen categories, a guest list with RSVPs and meal choices, and a checklist grouped by how far out each job is.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OPXVIA","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":67597865746526,"sku":"OPX-100","price":22.0,"currency_code":"CAD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0769\/2094\/6782\/files\/wedding-vendor-payment-tracker-01.jpg?v=1790832503"},{"product_id":"client-call-email-tracker","title":"Client Call and Email Tracker Spreadsheet","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis client tracker answers the question a plain client list cannot: who have you not spoken to in three weeks? It is a small business CRM for consultants, freelancers and service businesses who keep promising to follow up and need something that turns red when they forget.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlease read:\u003c\/strong\u003e This is a tracker tool only, not financial, tax, legal, medical or any other professional advice or advisory service. It records and calculates what you enter; you are solely responsible for checking all figures, rates, dates and results and for every decision you make. By purchasing, downloading or using it, you accept these terms (your statutory consumer rights are not affected).\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eEvery call and email, logged\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Contact Log is a communication log with room for 600 contacts. Each row records the date, client, channel, whether it was you or them, what it was about and what came of it.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOutcomes: Spoke, No answer, Left message, Replied, Booked a meeting, Quoted, Won or Lost\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eContacts this week, at a glance\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFollow-ups that turn red by themselves\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eEvery row carries what happens next and the date it is due. Next Due turns amber inside a week and red when it passes, and overdue follow-ups are counted at the top. That column is what turns a call log from a diary into a follow up tracker.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eReply rate per channel\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eCalls, emails and LinkedIn are each measured honestly: Spoke, Replied and Booked a meeting against everything logged. Six voicemails to someone who never calls back will pull the rate down, as they should. You see the reply rate overall and for each channel.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eAttached to the money\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eClients, invoices, income and expenses sit in the same file and read the same lists, so a client you billed is the same client in the log and there is no second spreadsheet to reconcile.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eA client list showing what each client has been billed\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAn invoice tracker with paid, unpaid and overdue\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIncome and expense registers, with monthly totals and a profit and loss\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eA dashboard reading all of it\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe eleven connected tabs are Start Here, Setup, Clients, Contact Log, Invoices, Income, Expenses, Monthly, Profit and Loss, Balances and Dashboard, making it a CRM spreadsheet with the books attached.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWorks with\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMicrosoft Excel 2016 or later, on Windows or Mac\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGoogle Sheets with a free Google account. The Google Sheets version is a real workbook you take a copy of, not a PDF with a link in it.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo dynamic arrays, no macros and no add-ins, so it behaves the same on Excel 2016, 2019, 2021 and Microsoft 365 and in LibreOffice. No Microsoft 365 subscription is required.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo subscription\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhat you download\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTwo Excel files: a consultancy's last ten weeks of calls and emails with fourteen follow-ups already overdue, and a blank one for your own clients\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe instruction guide, which has one-click links to the Google Sheets versions (filled and blank)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe terms of use as a PDF\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eYour files are ready to download as soon as payment clears. The file is for personal and business use on your own devices, so please do not share or resell it. Questions before or after you buy? Use our contact page and we will help.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it work in Excel or Google Sheets?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eBoth. The Excel files run on Excel 2016 or later on Windows or Mac, and the instruction guide has one-click links to make your own copy of the Google Sheets versions.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow does it remind me to follow up?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eEach contact has a next step and a due date. The date turns amber inside a week and red once it passes, and overdue follow-ups are counted at the top.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow many contacts can I log?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Contact Log has room for 600 calls, emails and messages.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I see which channel gets the most replies?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Reply rate is calculated overall and per channel, such as calls, emails and LinkedIn.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it track invoices too?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Clients, invoices with paid, unpaid and overdue, income, expenses and a profit and loss are all in the same file.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OPXVIA","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":67597865877598,"sku":"OPX-105","price":32.0,"currency_code":"CAD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0769\/2094\/6782\/files\/client-call-email-tracker-01.jpg?v=1790832528"},{"product_id":"tax-deduction-tracker-spreadsheet","title":"Tax Deduction Tracker Spreadsheet","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis tax deduction tracker fills in each category from the expenses you actually recorded, so you are not guessing in April what you spent on software in March. It is for self-employed people, freelancers and small business owners who want their figures in order before they meet an accountant.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlease read:\u003c\/strong\u003e Tax rules differ by country and by what you do. The percentages in here are common defaults, not universal ones, and they are yours to change. This file arranges your own numbers so an accountant can read them in five minutes. It is not tax advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eSpent is read, not typed\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Deductions tab adds up your own expense register by category and by the tax year set on Setup. The figure in each category is what you actually recorded, not a number typed in from memory.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpent per category, read from your own register\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWhat you can claim, per category and in total\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eThe share you claim, set by you\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThere are sixteen categories, each with a percentage you set and a note beside it reminding you to check the rule where you live. Rules differ by country and change over time, so the file never assumes a figure for you. The percentages included are common defaults and are yours to change.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eThe home office, worked out\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eEnter the rooms in your home, the rooms used only for work, how many days a week that room is used and your household costs for the year. One room of six used five days of seven comes to 11.9%, and on 14,400 of household costs that is 1,714. A calculated figure, not a box you guess at.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eThe whole ledger underneath\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e500 income rows and 500 rows for business expenses\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eA mileage tracker feeding the vehicle line\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMonthly, quarterly and any custom date range\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eEstimated tax set aside as you go\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eA profit and loss, and a dashboard reading all of it\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe thirteen connected tabs are Start Here, Setup, Expenses, Deductions, Income, Mileage, Monthly, Quarterly, Estimated Tax, Custom Range, Profit and Loss, Balances and Dashboard. Each entry is typed once, which keeps freelancer tax preparation to one register instead of several lists.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWorks with\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMicrosoft Excel 2016 or later, on Windows or Mac\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGoogle Sheets with a free Google account. The Google Sheets version is a real workbook you take a copy of, not a PDF with a link in it.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo dynamic arrays, no macros and no add-ins, so it behaves the same on Excel 2016, 2019, 2021 and Microsoft 365 and in LibreOffice. No Microsoft 365 subscription is required.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo subscription\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhat you download\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTwo Excel files: a freelancer's full year with the deduction schedule already reading it, and a blank one for your own\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe instruction guide, which has one-click links to the Google Sheets versions (filled and blank)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe terms of use as a PDF\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eYour files are ready to download as soon as payment clears. The file is for personal and business use on your own devices, so please do not share or resell it. Questions before or after you buy? Use our contact page and we will help.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it work in Excel or Google Sheets?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eBoth. The Excel files run on Excel 2016 or later on Windows or Mac, and the instruction guide has one-click links to make your own copy of the Google Sheets versions.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDo I have to type my spending into the deductions list?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. The Deductions tab reads your expense register by category and tax year, so you only enter each expense once.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it know the tax rules for my country?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. Each category has a percentage you set, with a note to check the rule where you live. The defaults are common ones, not universal, and this is not tax advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it work out my home office share?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Enter the rooms in your home, the rooms used for work, the days a week they are used and your household costs, and it calculates the share.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it track mileage?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The Mileage tab logs your trips and feeds the vehicle line on the deductions schedule.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OPXVIA","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":67597865910366,"sku":"OPX-106","price":27.0,"currency_code":"CAD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0769\/2094\/6782\/files\/tax-deduction-tracker-spreadsheet-01.jpg?v=1790832533"},{"product_id":"invoice-generator-tracker-spreadsheet","title":"Invoice Generator and Tracker Spreadsheet","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis invoice generator means you type each invoice once, not once on the page you send and again in a tracker. It is for freelancers and small service businesses who want their invoices, payments and bookkeeping in the same file.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlease read:\u003c\/strong\u003e This is a tracker tool only, not financial, tax, legal, medical or any other professional advice or advisory service. It records and calculates what you enter; you are solely responsible for checking all figures, rates, dates and results and for every decision you make. By purchasing, downloading or using it, you accept these terms (your statutory consumer rights are not affected).\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003ePick the invoice, and the page fills itself\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Invoice tab has a single dropdown. Choose an invoice number and the client, date, due date and status come across, with the line items listed underneath. Nothing on that page is typed. Print it or save it as a PDF and send it.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eA printable invoice template that fills itself from the dropdown\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eA tax rate you set for each invoice, with subtotal and total, because not everyone is registered and rates differ from place to place\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe net amount is what the tracker records, since that is what belongs in the income register\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eLine items that stay attached\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Line Items tab holds 400 lines in one list, each tagged to an invoice. The invoice pulls its own lines by rank using a COUNTIF rather than an array formula, so it opens in Excel 2016 and survives the move into Google Sheets intact.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eThe invoice tracker behind it\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe generator is one tab of a bookkeeping file, not a standalone template you reconcile by hand.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRoom for 120 invoices, with invoiced, paid, unpaid and overdue totaled at the top\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOverdue invoices flagged against today's date, so it doubles as a payment tracker\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eA client tracker showing what each client has been billed\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e500 income rows and 500 expense rows\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMonthly and quarterly totals, a profit and loss and a dashboard reading all of it\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe thirteen connected tabs are Start Here, Setup, Invoices, Line Items, Invoice, Clients, Income, Expenses, Monthly, Quarterly, Profit and Loss, Balances and Dashboard. A freelancer invoice and the year's books live in one place.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWorks with\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMicrosoft Excel 2016 or later, on Windows or Mac\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGoogle Sheets with a free Google account. The Google Sheets version is a real workbook you take a copy of, not a PDF with a link in it.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo dynamic arrays, no macros and no add-ins, so it behaves the same on Excel 2016, 2019, 2021 and Microsoft 365 and in LibreOffice. No Microsoft 365 subscription is required.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo subscription\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhat you download\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTwo Excel files: a freelance year with forty invoices, their line items and a full ledger behind them, and a blank one for your own business\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe instruction guide, which has one-click links to the Google Sheets versions (filled and blank)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe terms of use as a PDF\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eYour files are ready to download as soon as payment clears. The file is for personal and business use on your own devices, so please do not share or resell it. Questions before or after you buy? Use our contact page and we will help.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it work in Excel or Google Sheets?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eBoth. The Excel files run on Excel 2016 or later on Windows or Mac, and the instruction guide has one-click links to make your own copy of the Google Sheets versions.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow do I create an invoice?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eAdd the invoice and its line items to the lists, then pick its number from the dropdown on the Invoice tab. The page fills itself, ready to print or save as a PDF.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I add sales tax or VAT?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. You set a tax rate for each invoice, and the invoice shows the subtotal, tax and total. The tracker records the net amount.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow many invoices can it hold?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eUp to 120 invoices and 400 line items, with 500 income and 500 expense rows behind them.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWill it show me who has not paid?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The Invoices tab totals paid, unpaid and overdue at the top and flags overdue invoices against today's date.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OPXVIA","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":67597865943134,"sku":"OPX-107","price":29.0,"currency_code":"CAD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0769\/2094\/6782\/files\/invoice-generator-tracker-spreadsheet-01.jpg?v=1790832539"},{"product_id":"notary-signing-agent-tracker","title":"Notary and Loan Signing Agent Tracker Spreadsheet","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis notary signing agent tracker shows what each appointment actually earned once the drive is paid for. It is for mobile notaries and loan signing agents who run their own books and want to know which title companies and signing services are really worth the trip.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlease read:\u003c\/strong\u003e This is a tracker tool only, not financial, tax, legal, medical or any other professional advice or advisory service. It records and calculates what you enter; you are solely responsible for checking all figures, rates, dates and results and for every decision you make. By purchasing, downloading or using it, you accept these terms (your statutory consumer rights are not affected).\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eNet per job, after the drive\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eA signing fee is not what you keep when the appointment is a long drive away. For every job you enter the fee and the kilometers, the sheet applies your own mileage rate, and a net column shows what is actually left. That one figure is what tells you whose work to keep accepting.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eThree hundred signings\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Signings tab logs up to 300 appointments.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDate, type, company, page count, fee and status\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTen job types, from loan signing to apostille to jail signing\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBilled but not yet paid, totaled at the top, because signing services pay in thirty days and some do not pay at all\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eA printed yes\/no on every job, since print and paper come out of the same fee\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eA full ledger behind it\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eA notary business is self-employment, so the workbook carries the bookkeeping too, with your notary income and costs in one place.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eIncome and Expenses:\u003c\/strong\u003e 400 rows each\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMileage:\u003c\/strong\u003e a built-in mileage tracker for every trip\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMonthly and Quarterly:\u003c\/strong\u003e totals by period\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eEstimated Tax:\u003c\/strong\u003e an amount set aside as you go, so the April question already has an answer\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eProfit and Loss, Balances and Dashboard:\u003c\/strong\u003e the overall picture\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eClients, Start Here and Setup:\u003c\/strong\u003e your companies and a few minutes of setup\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWorks with\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMicrosoft Excel 2016, 2019, 2021 and Microsoft 365, on Windows and Mac, and LibreOffice\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGoogle Sheets with a free Google account. The Google Sheets version is a real workbook you copy, not a PDF with a link in it.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo dynamic arrays, no macros, no add-ins and no subscription\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhat you download\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTwo Excel files: a worked example of a mobile notary's last two months, including one cancellation, and a blank copy\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe instruction guide, which has one-click links to the Google Sheets versions\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe terms of use as a PDF\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eYour files are ready as soon as payment clears. The tracker is for personal and business use on your own devices, so please do not share or resell the files. Questions? Reach us through our contact page.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDo I need Excel, or can I use Google Sheets?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eEither. The download has Excel files for Excel 2016 or later on Windows and Mac, and the instruction guide has one-click links to copy the Google Sheets versions with a free Google account.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow does it work out net per job?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYou enter the fee and the distance for each signing. The sheet applies your own mileage rate and shows the fee less the drive.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat types of signings can I log?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eTen job types are built in, ranging from loan signings to apostilles to jail signings, with company, page count, fee and status on each.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it help with self-employment tax?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt sets aside an estimated tax amount from the income you record and keeps monthly, quarterly and profit and loss totals. It is a tracker, not tax advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I see who still owes me?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Everything billed but not yet paid is totaled at the top of the Signings tab.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OPXVIA","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":67597866467422,"sku":"OPX-119","price":29.0,"currency_code":"CAD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0769\/2094\/6782\/files\/notary-signing-agent-tracker-01.jpg?v=1790832605"},{"product_id":"soap-business-cost-calculator","title":"Soap Making Business Planner Spreadsheet","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis soap business planner answers the question every soap maker eventually asks: what does one bar really cost in materials? It links your batches to the oils, lye, fragrance and wrappers that went into them, then divides by the bars that came out of the mold, with the bookkeeping kept in the same workbook.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlease read:\u003c\/strong\u003e This is a tracker tool only, not financial, tax, legal, medical or any other professional advice or advisory service. It records and calculates what you enter; you are solely responsible for checking all figures, rates, dates and results and for every decision you make. By purchasing, downloading or using it, you accept these terms (your statutory consumer rights are not affected).\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eBatches and what went into them\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eMost soap templates keep the recipe and the order form apart, so the cost per bar still ends up on paper. Here the two are joined, and the sheet works as a soap cost calculator and batch tracker at once.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e120 batches, each with its price, date and status\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e300 component lines, each tagged to a batch from a dropdown\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFive batch states, from Planned to Sold out\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCost per batch summed from its components, then cost per bar calculated\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eIn the worked example, a bar of oatmeal and honey comes to 0.69 in materials.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eMargin per batch\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eEach batch is compared with the price you charge. The margin shows red under 40% and green over 60%, so a rise in the price of a fragrance oil appears as a color change before it reaches the bank account. An if it all sells figure, bars made times price less what they cost, is shown per batch and totaled, which makes the sheet a simple profit calculator for every recipe.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eOne honest note about cost\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe cost here is materials only. It does not include your time, and the tab says so. A 90% materials margin is not a 90% business, so treat this number as a guide to which batches are worth making rather than your full profit.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eThe whole ledger behind it\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eIncome and Expenses:\u003c\/strong\u003e both registers for the business\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eInventory:\u003c\/strong\u003e soap inventory and stock on hand\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMonthly, Quarterly and Profit and Loss:\u003c\/strong\u003e the totals by period\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBalances and Dashboard:\u003c\/strong\u003e the overall picture\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eStart Here and Setup:\u003c\/strong\u003e setup in a few minutes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWorks with\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMicrosoft Excel 2016, 2019, 2021 and Microsoft 365, on Windows and Mac, and LibreOffice\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGoogle Sheets with a free Google account. The Google Sheets version is a real workbook you copy, not a PDF with a link in it.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo dynamic arrays, no macros, no add-ins and no subscription\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhat you download\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTwo Excel files: a worked example with eight real batches from planned to sold out, costed down to the wrapper, and a blank copy\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe instruction guide, which has one-click links to the Google Sheets versions\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe terms of use as a PDF\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eYour files are ready as soon as payment clears. The planner is for personal and business use on your own devices, so please do not share or resell the files. Questions? Reach us through our contact page.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDo I need Excel, or can I use Google Sheets?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eEither. The download has Excel files for Excel 2016 or later on Windows and Mac, and the instruction guide has one-click links to copy the Google Sheets versions with a free Google account.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow does it calculate cost per bar?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eEvery component line is tagged to a batch. The sheet sums the components for each batch and divides by the number of bars made.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes the cost include my time?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. The cost is materials only, and the tab says so. Your time is not part of the figure.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I see where each batch stands?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eEach batch has one of five states, running from Planned to Sold out, so you can see where every batch stands.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs there bookkeeping as well?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. There are income and expense registers, inventory, monthly and quarterly totals, a profit and loss and a dashboard.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OPXVIA","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":67597866532958,"sku":"OPX-120","price":27.0,"currency_code":"CAD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0769\/2094\/6782\/files\/soap-business-cost-calculator-01.jpg?v=1790832612"},{"product_id":"tshirt-apparel-business-planner","title":"T-Shirt and Apparel Business Planner Spreadsheet","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis tshirt business planner works out what each garment really costs you, run by run. It is for print shops and small clothing brands that want the blank, the print, the neck label and the mailer added together, so a hoodie and a tee can be compared on real numbers.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlease read:\u003c\/strong\u003e This is a tracker tool only, not financial, tax, legal, medical or any other professional advice or advisory service. It records and calculates what you enter; you are solely responsible for checking all figures, rates, dates and results and for every decision you make. By purchasing, downloading or using it, you accept these terms (your statutory consumer rights are not affected).\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eThe blank is not the cost\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eMost clothing business templates offer an inventory list and an order form and never add the four costs together. Here each print run carries its full garment cost.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e120 print runs, each with design, price and status\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e300 component lines for blanks, print, labels and mailers, each tagged to a run from a dropdown\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCost per garment calculated from those components\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhether you use screen printing, DTG, embroidery or vinyl, the print is simply a component line with a cost.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eMargin per run\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eEach run is checked against the price you charge, and the margin turns red under 40%. When your supplier raises the price of a blank, it shows up here first. An if it all sells figure, made times price less cost, is shown for every run, so this works as a margin tracker across your whole range.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eHoodie against tee\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eAn embroidered hoodie and a one-color screen printed tee are different businesses. With cost per garment side by side, you can see which runs earn their place instead of relying on a feeling that hoodies are better.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eThe whole ledger behind it\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eIncome and Expenses:\u003c\/strong\u003e both registers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eInventory:\u003c\/strong\u003e apparel inventory and stock tracking\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMonthly, Quarterly and Profit and Loss:\u003c\/strong\u003e totals by period\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBalances and Dashboard:\u003c\/strong\u003e the full picture\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eStart Here and Setup:\u003c\/strong\u003e setup in a few minutes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWorks with\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMicrosoft Excel 2016, 2019, 2021 and Microsoft 365, on Windows and Mac, and LibreOffice\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGoogle Sheets with a free Google account. The Google Sheets version is a real workbook you copy, not a PDF with a link in it.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo dynamic arrays, no macros, no add-ins and no subscription\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhat you download\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTwo Excel files: a worked example with six real runs, tees, a tote, a hoodie and a crew, costed down to the mailer, and a blank copy\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe instruction guide, which has one-click links to the Google Sheets versions\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe terms of use as a PDF\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eYour files are ready as soon as payment clears. The planner is for personal and business use on your own devices, so please do not share or resell the files. Questions? Reach us through our contact page.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDo I need Excel, or can I use Google Sheets?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eEither. The download has Excel files for Excel 2016 or later on Windows and Mac, and the instruction guide has one-click links to copy the Google Sheets versions with a free Google account.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat goes into the cost per garment?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eEvery component line tagged to a run, such as the blank, the print, the neck label and the mailer, summed and divided by how many garments you made.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it work for DTG or embroidery as well as screen printing?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The print method is entered as a component line with its own cost, whatever method you use.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow will I know if a run is not profitable enough?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eMargin is calculated per run against your price and turns red under 40%.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow many runs can I track?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eUp to 120 print runs and 300 component lines.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OPXVIA","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":67597866631262,"sku":"OPX-122","price":27.0,"currency_code":"CAD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0769\/2094\/6782\/files\/tshirt-apparel-business-planner-01.jpg?v=1790832623"},{"product_id":"florist-flower-order-cost-calculator","title":"Florist Flower Order and Cost Calculator","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis florist business calculator costs your flowers stem by stem before you send the quote, not after the event. It is for wedding florists and flower shops who want to see the cost and margin of every arrangement in a job, and to catch the one that is losing money while there is still time to change it.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlease read:\u003c\/strong\u003e This is a tracker tool only, not financial, tax, legal, medical or any other professional advice or advisory service. It records and calculates what you enter; you are solely responsible for checking all figures, rates, dates and results and for every decision you make. By purchasing, downloading or using it, you accept these terms (your statutory consumer rights are not affected).\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eStems, costed before you quote\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Stem Count tab works like a recipe cost sheet for floral design. It holds 120 lines, each tagged to an arrangement.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe flower, how many stems, the unit and the unit cost\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFive units: stem, bunch, yard, each and gram\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLine cost calculated, then summed into a cost per arrangement\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWhat you sold the arrangement for, right beside its cost\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eStems counted for each arrangement\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eMargin against the trade rule of thumb\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eA common guide in floristry is that flowers should be about a third of the price, which is a profit margin of around 67%. Any arrangement under 65% turns red. That does not mean the job is wrong. It means a lower margin is something you chose rather than something you found out later.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eOne margin per arrangement\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eA wedding is not one number. The bridal bouquet, the posies, the buttonholes, the centerpieces and the arch are kept as separate arrangements, each with its own margin. That mirrors how a wedding quote actually breaks down and shows you which single line is dragging the job down.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eThe ledger behind it\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eA flower business is still a business, so the bookkeeping sits in the same file.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eClients:\u003c\/strong\u003e who you work for\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eIncome and Expenses:\u003c\/strong\u003e both registers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMonthly, Quarterly and Profit and Loss:\u003c\/strong\u003e totals by period\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBalances and Dashboard:\u003c\/strong\u003e the full picture\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eStart Here and Setup:\u003c\/strong\u003e setup in a few minutes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWorks with\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMicrosoft Excel 2016, 2019, 2021 and Microsoft 365, on Windows and Mac, and LibreOffice\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGoogle Sheets with a free Google account. The Google Sheets version is a real workbook you copy, not a PDF with a link in it.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo dynamic arrays, no macros, no add-ins and no subscription\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhat you download\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTwo Excel files: a worked example of a full wedding with bouquet, posies, buttonholes, centerpieces and an arch, and a blank copy\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe instruction guide, which has one-click links to the Google Sheets versions\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe terms of use as a PDF\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eYour files are ready the moment payment clears. The calculator is for personal and business use on your own devices, so please do not share or resell the files. Questions? Reach us through our contact page.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDo I need Excel, or can I use Google Sheets?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eEither. The download has Excel files for Excel 2016 or later on Windows and Mac, and the instruction guide has one-click links to copy the Google Sheets versions with a free Google account.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I cost foliage and ribbon that are not sold by the stem?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Each line can use one of five units: stem, bunch, yard, each or gram.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhy does an arrangement turn red?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eMargin is checked against the rule of thumb that flowers are about a third of the price. Any arrangement with a margin under 65% turns red.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I see the margin on each part of a wedding?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The bouquet, posies, buttonholes, centerpieces and arch are separate arrangements, each with its own cost and margin.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow many stem lines does it hold?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Stem Count tab has 120 lines across your arrangements.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OPXVIA","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":67597866696798,"sku":"OPX-123","price":27.0,"currency_code":"CAD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0769\/2094\/6782\/files\/florist-flower-order-cost-calculator-01.jpg?v=1790832628"},{"product_id":"meeting-minutes-action-tracker","title":"Meeting Minutes and Action Tracker Spreadsheet","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis meeting minutes tracker counts what each meeting actually produced and whether any of it got done. It is for managers, team leads and anyone who chairs a recurring team meeting and wants to see which actions are open, overdue or stuck.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlease read:\u003c\/strong\u003e This is a tracker tool only, not financial, tax, legal, medical or any other professional advice or advisory service. It records and calculates what you enter; you are solely responsible for checking all figures, rates, dates and results and for every decision you make. By purchasing, downloading or using it, you accept these terms (your statutory consumer rights are not affected).\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eMeetings and actions, linked\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis is not meant to replace a notes app for typing. It is built to count what came out of your notes, which a notes app cannot do. Meetings and actions live in two tables, and each action points to its meeting from a dropdown.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eA meeting log for 80 meetings, with date, attendees and length\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e250 actions, each tied to a meeting\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eActions, done and open, counted on each meeting row\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eA weekly meeting that has raised four actions in six weeks and closed none of them is visible without opening anything.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eOwners, due dates and blocked\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Actions tab is an action tracker and follow up tracker in one.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAn owner and a due date on every action\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOverdue actions shown in red against today, not left as an unticked box\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBlocked as its own state, and counted, because waiting on someone else is a different problem from work in progress\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eHours in meetings\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe length of every meeting is added up into total hours spent in meetings. It is a simple figure, and usually a persuasive one when you are deciding which meetings to keep.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eTasks, Today and the dashboard\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTasks:\u003c\/strong\u003e the work that sits outside any one meeting\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eToday:\u003c\/strong\u003e what is due, gathered for you\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDashboard:\u003c\/strong\u003e reads the whole meeting organizer at a glance\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eStart Here and Setup:\u003c\/strong\u003e setup in a few minutes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWorks with\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMicrosoft Excel 2016, 2019, 2021 and Microsoft 365, on Windows and Mac, and LibreOffice\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGoogle Sheets with a free Google account. The Google Sheets version is a real workbook you copy, not a PDF with a link in it.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo dynamic arrays, no macros, no add-ins and no subscription\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhat you download\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTwo Excel files: a worked example with twelve meetings and twenty actions, five still open, and a blank copy\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe instruction guide, which has one-click links to the Google Sheets versions\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe terms of use as a PDF\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eYour files are ready the moment payment clears. The tracker is for personal and business use on your own devices, so please do not share or resell the files. Questions? Reach us through our contact page.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDo I need Excel, or can I use Google Sheets?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eEither. The download has Excel files for Excel 2016 or later on Windows and Mac, and the instruction guide has one-click links to copy the Google Sheets versions with a free Google account.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow are actions linked to meetings?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eEach action picks its meeting from a dropdown. The meeting row then counts its actions, how many are done and how many are open.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I see which actions are overdue?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Every action has an owner and a due date, and anything past its date shows in red against today.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat does the blocked state do?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eBlocked is a separate status from in progress, and blocked actions are counted, so work waiting on someone else stands out.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow many meetings and actions does it hold?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eUp to 80 meetings and 250 actions.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OPXVIA","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":67597866762334,"sku":"OPX-125","price":22.0,"currency_code":"CAD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0769\/2094\/6782\/files\/meeting-minutes-action-tracker-01.jpg?v=1790832639"},{"product_id":"real-estate-transaction-coordinator-tracker","title":"Real Estate Transaction Tracker Spreadsheet","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis real estate transaction tracker puts every contingency date on the deal row and only turns a date red when it is a genuine miss. It is for transaction coordinators and agents juggling many open files who need to see which deadline needs attention this morning.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlease read:\u003c\/strong\u003e This is a tracker tool only, not financial, tax, legal, medical or any other professional advice or advisory service. It records and calculates what you enter; you are solely responsible for checking all figures, rates, dates and results and for every decision you make. By purchasing, downloading or using it, you accept these terms (your statutory consumer rights are not affected).\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFive contingency dates on every row\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eA property, a stage and a closing date is not enough for a transaction coordinator. The dates in between are the job. Each transaction carries five contingency dates:\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eInspection, appraisal, title and survey, financing, and final walkthrough\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eEach worked out as the contract date plus a number of days you set once on Setup\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAll five appear as soon as you type the contract date\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eContingency periods differ by contract and by state. The day counts are yours to set on Setup; the defaults are a starting point, not legal advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eDeadlines that only go red when they matter\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eA date turns red only if it has passed and the deal has not reached that stage yet. A file in financing has its inspection date behind it because it passed inspection, so it is not counted as a miss. That keeps the past-deadline count honest instead of a sea of red that gets ignored.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAmber when a deadline is inside three days\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDeadlines past, counted\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDeals closing in the next 14 days on the KPI strip, a built-in closing tracker\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFees in play and volume\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe tracker doubles as a commission tracker.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e120 transactions with side, price, commission and stage\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCommission percentage per side and fee per file\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe total of every fee on deals that have not closed, plus volume under contract\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e60 clients behind the pipeline\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eThe business behind it\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eA TC runs a business, not just a calendar, so this realtor spreadsheet carries the books as well.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eIncome and Expenses:\u003c\/strong\u003e both registers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMonthly, Quarterly and Profit and Loss:\u003c\/strong\u003e totals by period\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBalances and Dashboard:\u003c\/strong\u003e account balances and the full picture\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eStart Here and Setup:\u003c\/strong\u003e setup in a few minutes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWorks with\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMicrosoft Excel 2016, 2019, 2021 and Microsoft 365, on Windows and Mac, and LibreOffice\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGoogle Sheets with a free Google account. The Google Sheets version is a real workbook you copy, not a PDF with a link in it.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo dynamic arrays, no macros, no add-ins and no subscription\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhat you download\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTwo Excel files: a worked pipeline of twelve files with nine under contract, three closings inside two weeks and three deadlines genuinely missed, and a blank copy\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe instruction guide, which has one-click links to the Google Sheets versions\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe terms of use as a PDF\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eYour files are ready the moment payment clears. The tracker is for personal and business use on your own devices, so please do not share or resell the files. Questions? Reach us through our contact page.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDo I need Excel, or can I use Google Sheets?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eEither. The download has Excel files for Excel 2016 or later on Windows and Mac, and the instruction guide has one-click links to copy the Google Sheets versions with a free Google account.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow are the contingency dates calculated?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eEach is the contract date plus a number of days you set on Setup, for inspection, appraisal, title and survey, financing and final walkthrough.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWill a date go red after the deal has moved past it?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. A date only turns red if it has passed and the deal has not reached that stage, and it turns amber when it is inside three days.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAre the default day counts right for my state?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eContingency periods differ by contract and by state. The day counts are yours to set, and the defaults are a starting point, not legal advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it track my fees?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. It records commission per side and fee per file, and totals the fees on deals that have not closed along with volume under contract.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OPXVIA","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":67597867024478,"sku":"OPX-131","price":32.0,"currency_code":"CAD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0769\/2094\/6782\/files\/real-estate-transaction-coordinator-tracker-01.jpg?v=1790832674"},{"product_id":"loan-officer-mortgage-pipeline-tracker","title":"Loan Officer Client Pipeline Tracker","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis loan officer pipeline tracker puts the one real deadline on a loan file, the rate lock, right on the row with the days left counted every morning. It is for loan officers and mortgage brokers who want their mortgage pipeline, their volume and their own business books in one workbook.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlease read:\u003c\/strong\u003e This is a tracker tool only, not financial, tax, legal, medical or any other professional advice or advisory service. It records and calculates what you enter; you are solely responsible for checking all figures, rates, dates and results and for every decision you make. By purchasing, downloading or using it, you accept these terms (your statutory consumer rights are not affected).\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eLock expiry on every loan\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eMost loan officer templates are contact lists with a stage column, and a contact list has no deadline in it. Here every loan carries its rate lock expiry date.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDays left worked out against today, in red when it gets close\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLocks expiring in the next 10 days counted on the KPI strip, the first number to check each day\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNine stages as a dropdown, from enquiry to funded or declined, so the counts cannot drift on a typo\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eVolume in play and funded this year\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Pipeline tab holds 150 loans with borrower, amount, kind, rate and stage. From that one stage column, the mortgage tracker works out two numbers:\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLoans live, and the volume behind them\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFunded volume for this year, counted separately\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt also shows the average rate across the whole book, because that is often the first thing anyone asks you.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eClients behind the loan pipeline\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Clients tab holds 60 clients, so each loan links back to a person rather than a loose row.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eThe business behind it\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eCommission is income, and a pipeline is not a profit and loss, so the workbook keeps the books as well.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eIncome and Expenses:\u003c\/strong\u003e both registers\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMonthly, Quarterly and Profit and Loss:\u003c\/strong\u003e totals by period\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBalances and Dashboard:\u003c\/strong\u003e account balances and the full picture\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eStart Here and Setup:\u003c\/strong\u003e setup in a few minutes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eA spreadsheet, not a compliance system. Your lender's own records are the record.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWorks with\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMicrosoft Excel 2016, 2019, 2021 and Microsoft 365, on Windows and Mac, and LibreOffice\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGoogle Sheets with a free Google account. The Google Sheets version is a real workbook you copy, not a PDF with a link in it.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo dynamic arrays, no macros, no add-ins and no subscription\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhat you download\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTwo Excel files: a worked book of fourteen loans, eleven live, with a 6.07% average rate and two locks about to expire, and a blank copy\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe instruction guide, which has one-click links to the Google Sheets versions\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe terms of use as a PDF\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eYour files are ready the moment payment clears. The tracker is for personal and business use on your own devices, so please do not share or resell the files. Questions? Reach us through our contact page.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDo I need Excel, or can I use Google Sheets?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eEither. The download has Excel files for Excel 2016 or later on Windows and Mac, and the instruction guide has one-click links to copy the Google Sheets versions with a free Google account.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow does it warn me about expiring rate locks?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eEach loan has a lock expiry date with days left counted against today, shown in red when close, and the number of locks expiring within 10 days sits on the KPI strip.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat stages does the pipeline use?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNine stages chosen from a dropdown, running from enquiry through to funded or declined.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I see my funded volume for the year?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Funded this year is counted separately from live volume, both off the same stage column.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs it a compliance system?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. It is a spreadsheet, not a compliance system, and your lender's own records are the record.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OPXVIA","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":67597867057246,"sku":"OPX-132","price":29.0,"currency_code":"CAD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0769\/2094\/6782\/files\/loan-officer-mortgage-pipeline-tracker-01.jpg?v=1790832680"},{"product_id":"podcast-planner-episode-tracker","title":"Podcast Episode Planner Spreadsheet","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis podcast planner treats your show as a feed with numbers attached, not just a list of episodes. It is for podcasters who book guests, sell sponsor reads and cut each episode into clips, and want to know which ideas, formats and platforms are actually working.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlease read:\u003c\/strong\u003e This is a tracker tool only, not financial, tax, legal, medical or any other professional advice or advisory service. It records and calculates what you enter; you are solely responsible for checking all figures, rates, dates and results and for every decision you make. By purchasing, downloading or using it, you accept these terms (your statutory consumer rights are not affected).\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eOne episode plan, and everything reads it\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Episode Plan is an episode tracker for 400 episodes and cuts. The full episode, three clips, the newsletter and the YouTube cut all carry the idea they came from, so nothing is typed twice.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDownloads, reviews, follows, saves and shares stored for each episode\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eEngagement rate calculated, then ranked by format, by platform, by pillar and by funnel stage\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRepurposing shows which ideas you have used to the full and which still have more in them\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eA six-week content calendar built from the plan\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe useful question is rarely how one episode did. It is which kind of episode keeps doing well, and the podcast analytics tabs answer that.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eGuests as a booking system\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Guests tab is a guest tracker for 120 guests, with who you asked, when, what they do, their status and the episode they appear on. The air date is looked up from the plan, so moving an episode never leaves a guest pointing at the wrong week. Anyone asked more than two weeks ago with no reply turns red.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eSponsors, with cost per thousand worked out\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Sponsors tab is a sponsor tracker for 60 sponsor reads, each with fee, status and platform. It divides the fee by downloads on that platform to give cost per thousand downloads, the figure that tells you whether to ask for more next time.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eGoals, cadence and money\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCadence:\u003c\/strong\u003e how often you publish, measured against your goal week by week and per platform\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePillars:\u003c\/strong\u003e the share of episodes you wanted for each theme against the share you got\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFinance:\u003c\/strong\u003e earned, cost and kept, and what that comes to per published episode\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThe Show, Goals, Ideas and Platform Analytics:\u003c\/strong\u003e the rest of the plan, with a dashboard reading all of it\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eStart Here and Setup:\u003c\/strong\u003e setup in a few minutes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWorks with\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMicrosoft Excel 2016, 2019, 2021 and Microsoft 365, on Windows and Mac, and LibreOffice\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGoogle Sheets with a free Google account. The Google Sheets version is a real workbook you copy, not a PDF with a link in it.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo dynamic arrays, no macros, no add-ins and no subscription\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhat you download\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTwo Excel files: a worked eight months with 26 ideas turned into 65 releases, 51 published, 128,250 downloads, twenty guests and ten sponsors, and a blank copy\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe instruction guide, which has one-click links to the Google Sheets versions\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe terms of use as a PDF\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eYour files are ready the moment payment clears. The planner is for personal and business use on your own devices, so please do not share or resell the files. Questions? Reach us through our contact page.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDo I need Excel, or can I use Google Sheets?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eEither. The download has Excel files for Excel 2016 or later on Windows and Mac, and the instruction guide has one-click links to copy the Google Sheets versions with a free Google account.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow does it work out sponsor cost per thousand downloads?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eEach sponsor read records its fee and platform. The sheet divides the fee by the downloads on that platform to give the cost per thousand.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat happens to a guest if I move their episode?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe guest's air date is looked up from the episode plan, so it follows the episode to its new week automatically.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I track clips and other cuts of an episode?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Clips, the newsletter and the YouTube cut each get a row that carries the original idea, and the Repurposing tab shows how much each idea has been used.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhich podcast stats can I record?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eDownloads, reviews, follows, saves and shares per episode, with engagement rate calculated and ranked by format, platform, pillar and funnel stage.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OPXVIA","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":67597867155550,"sku":"OPX-135","price":24.0,"currency_code":"CAD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0769\/2094\/6782\/files\/podcast-planner-episode-tracker-01.jpg?v=1790832697"},{"product_id":"auto-detailing-mobile-mechanic-bookkeeping","title":"Auto Detailing and Mobile Mechanic Bookkeeping Spreadsheet","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis auto detailing bookkeeping spreadsheet opens on the income and costs of your trade, not a chart of accounts written for a shop. It is for car detailing and mobile mechanic businesses who want clean mechanic bookkeeping, a mileage log and a tax estimate without adapting a generic template.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlease read:\u003c\/strong\u003e This is a tracker tool only, not financial, tax, legal, medical or any other professional advice or advisory service. It records and calculates what you enter; you are solely responsible for checking all figures, rates, dates and results and for every decision you make. By purchasing, downloading or using it, you accept these terms (your statutory consumer rights are not affected).\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eIncome and expense lines for this trade\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eA generic ledger gives you product sales and service income, which is not how a detailing business earns. Here the categories match the work, and both lists are dropdowns so a year of entries adds up cleanly.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eIncome:\u003c\/strong\u003e Detailing jobs, Mechanical work, Ceramic coating and Parts resold\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eExpenses:\u003c\/strong\u003e Chemicals and consumables, Parts and spares, Water and power, Waste disposal and more\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eLabor and parts, kept apart\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eA valet is labor and a brake job is parts. Both come out of the same van, and a generic template lumps them together. This ledger keeps the two revenue lines separate, so you can see what each side of the detailing business is really bringing in.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eMileage with your own reasons\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eEvery trip gets a reason from a dropdown: mobile job, parts factor, supplier or recovery. The year's total is a number you read, not an afternoon spent adding up a diary.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eThe rest of the ledger\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eIncome and Expenses:\u003c\/strong\u003e 500 rows each\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMonthly and Quarterly:\u003c\/strong\u003e totals by period, which is how tax gets filed\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eEstimated Tax:\u003c\/strong\u003e an amount set aside as you go\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eProfit and Loss:\u003c\/strong\u003e built from the same two lists\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eClients:\u003c\/strong\u003e 10 client records with what each has been worth\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBalances and Dashboard:\u003c\/strong\u003e what the business holds, and the full picture\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eStart Here and Setup:\u003c\/strong\u003e setup in a few minutes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eA bookkeeping spreadsheet, not an accountant. Tax rates and what you can claim are yours to set and yours to check.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWorks with\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMicrosoft Excel 2016, 2019, 2021 and Microsoft 365, on Windows and Mac, and LibreOffice\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGoogle Sheets with a free Google account. The Google Sheets version is a real workbook you copy, not a PDF with a link in it.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo dynamic arrays, no macros, no add-ins and no subscription\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhat you download\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTwo Excel files: a worked year with 406 income entries and 396 expense entries kept at a 42% margin, and a blank copy\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe instruction guide, which has one-click links to the Google Sheets versions\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe terms of use as a PDF\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eYour files are ready the moment payment clears. The spreadsheet is for personal and business use on your own devices, so please do not share or resell the files. Questions? Reach us through our contact page.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDo I need Excel, or can I use Google Sheets?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eEither. The download has Excel files for Excel 2016 or later on Windows and Mac, and the instruction guide has one-click links to copy the Google Sheets versions with a free Google account.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it work for a mobile mechanic as well as a detailer?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The income lines include Detailing jobs, Mechanical work, Ceramic coating and Parts resold, so both kinds of work are recorded separately.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow does the mileage log work?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eEach trip has a reason from a dropdown, such as mobile job, parts factor, supplier or recovery, and the year is totaled for you.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWill it calculate my tax?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt sets aside an estimated tax amount as you go. It is a bookkeeping spreadsheet, not an accountant, so tax rates and what you can claim are yours to set and check.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow many entries does it hold?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e500 income rows and 500 expense rows, plus 10 client records.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OPXVIA","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":67597867221086,"sku":"OPX-136","price":29.0,"currency_code":"CAD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0769\/2094\/6782\/files\/auto-detailing-mobile-mechanic-bookkeeping-01.jpg?v=1790832702"},{"product_id":"electrician-bookkeeping-invoice-tracker","title":"Electrician Bookkeeping and Invoice Tracker","description":"\u003cp\u003eThis electrician bookkeeping spreadsheet starts with the income and costs of electrical work instead of a chart of accounts made for a shop. It is for self employed electricians and small electrical business owners who want their invoices, mileage, tax estimate and profit in one workbook.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003ePlease read:\u003c\/strong\u003e This is a tracker tool only, not financial, tax, legal, medical or any other professional advice or advisory service. It records and calculates what you enter; you are solely responsible for checking all figures, rates, dates and results and for every decision you make. By purchasing, downloading or using it, you accept these terms (your statutory consumer rights are not affected).\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eCategories written for the trade\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eGeneric ledgers offer product sales and service income. Here the income and expense lines describe what an electrician actually earns and spends, and both are dropdowns, so a year of entries adds up without near-duplicate categories.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eIncome:\u003c\/strong\u003e Domestic work, Commercial work, Testing and certification, and EV and solar\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eExpenses:\u003c\/strong\u003e Materials, Subcontractors, Tools and test gear, Certification and scheme, and more\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eCertification is revenue, not overhead\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eAn EICR is billable work, while a scheme membership is a cost. A generic chart of accounts has a place for neither. This one records testing and certification as its own income line, so you can see what that side of the business earns.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eInvoices and mileage\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eInvoices:\u003c\/strong\u003e an invoice tracker for invoices raised, sent, paid and overdue\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMileage:\u003c\/strong\u003e a mileage log with each trip given a reason from a dropdown, such as site visit, wholesaler, quote visit or callout, with the year totaled\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eThe rest of the ledger\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eIncome and Expenses:\u003c\/strong\u003e 500 rows each\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMonthly and Quarterly:\u003c\/strong\u003e totals by period, which is how tax gets filed\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eEstimated Tax:\u003c\/strong\u003e an amount set aside as you go\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eProfit and Loss:\u003c\/strong\u003e built from the same two lists\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eClients:\u003c\/strong\u003e 10 client records with what each has been worth\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBalances and Dashboard:\u003c\/strong\u003e what the business holds, and the full picture\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eStart Here and Setup:\u003c\/strong\u003e setup in a few minutes\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eA bookkeeping spreadsheet, not an accountant. Tax rates and what you can claim are yours to set and yours to check.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWorks with\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMicrosoft Excel 2016, 2019, 2021 and Microsoft 365, on Windows and Mac, and LibreOffice\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGoogle Sheets with a free Google account. The Google Sheets version is a real workbook you copy, not a PDF with a link in it.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo dynamic arrays, no macros, no add-ins and no subscription\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhat you download\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTwo Excel files: a worked year with 308 income entries and 366 expense entries kept at a 21.5% margin, and a blank copy\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe instruction guide, which has one-click links to the Google Sheets versions\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe terms of use as a PDF\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003eYour files are ready the moment payment clears. The spreadsheet is for personal and business use on your own devices, so please do not share or resell the files. Questions? Reach us through our contact page.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDo I need Excel, or can I use Google Sheets?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eEither. The download has Excel files for Excel 2016 or later on Windows and Mac, and the instruction guide has one-click links to copy the Google Sheets versions with a free Google account.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I track invoices that are overdue?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The Invoices tab follows each invoice as raised, sent, paid or overdue.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhere does testing and certification work go?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt has its own income line, Testing and certification, separate from domestic, commercial and EV and solar work.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWill it calculate my tax?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt sets aside an estimated tax amount as you go. It is a bookkeeping spreadsheet, not an accountant, so tax rates and what you can claim are yours to set and check.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow does the mileage log work?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eEach trip has a reason from a dropdown, such as site visit, wholesaler, quote visit or callout, and the year is totaled.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"OPXVIA","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":67597867253854,"sku":"OPX-137","price":29.0,"currency_code":"CAD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0769\/2094\/6782\/files\/electrician-bookkeeping-invoice-tracker-01.jpg?v=1790832709"}],"url":"https:\/\/opxviashop.com\/collections\/small-business.oembed?page=4","provider":"OPXVIA","version":"1.0","type":"link"}